US20140336356A1 - Peptide agonists of glp-1 activity - Google Patents

Peptide agonists of glp-1 activity Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20140336356A1
US20140336356A1 US14/095,667 US201314095667A US2014336356A1 US 20140336356 A1 US20140336356 A1 US 20140336356A1 US 201314095667 A US201314095667 A US 201314095667A US 2014336356 A1 US2014336356 A1 US 2014336356A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
lys
xaa
peptide
seq
exendin
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US14/095,667
Inventor
Bjarne D. Larsen
Jens D. Mikkelsen
Søren Neve
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
ZP Holding SPV KS
Original Assignee
Zealand Pharma AS
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from US11/515,812 external-priority patent/US20070111940A1/en
Application filed by Zealand Pharma AS filed Critical Zealand Pharma AS
Priority to US14/095,667 priority Critical patent/US20140336356A1/en
Publication of US20140336356A1 publication Critical patent/US20140336356A1/en
Assigned to ZEALAND PHARMA A/S reassignment ZEALAND PHARMA A/S ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: MIKKELSEN, JENS DAMSGAARD, LARSEN, BJARNE DUE, NEVE, Søren
Assigned to ZP HOLDING SPV K/S reassignment ZP HOLDING SPV K/S ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: ZEALAND PHARMA A/S
Priority to US15/183,522 priority patent/US20170107267A1/en
Priority to US15/950,413 priority patent/US20180362611A1/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K14/00—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K14/435—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans
    • C07K14/575—Hormones
    • C07K14/605—Glucagons
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00—Medicinal preparations containing peptides
    • A61K38/16—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • A61K38/17—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans
    • A61K38/22—Hormones
    • A61K38/26—Glucagons
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/62—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being a protein, peptide or polyamino acid
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/04—Anorexiants; Antiobesity agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/08—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis
    • A61P3/10—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis for hyperglycaemia, e.g. antidiabetics
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K14/00—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K14/435—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans
    • C07K14/575—Hormones
    • C07K14/57563—Vasoactive intestinal peptide [VIP]; Related peptides
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00—Medicinal preparations containing peptides

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to novel peptide agonists of GLP-1 activity. More specifically the invention relates to novel peptides that lower blood glucose levels comprising variants of the exendin-4 polypeptide sequence and peptide conjugates comprising variants of the GLP-1 or the exendin-4 polypeptide sequences which are pharmacologically active and stable, and as agonists of GLP-1 activity are useful in the treatment of diseases that benefit from regulation of excess levels of blood glucose and/or regulation of gastric emptying, such as diabetes and eating disorders.
  • the present invention also relates to methods of preparing said novel peptides, a composition, e.g., a pharmaceutical composition, comprising a peptide of the invention and a physiologically acceptable carrier, to said peptide for use in therapy, a method of treating a disorder and to the use of said peptide for the manufacture of a pharmaceutical composition for use in therapy.
  • GLP-1 glucose-dependent insulinotropic polypeptide
  • GLP-1 glucagon-like peptide 1
  • GLP-1 ⁇ rskov, 1992, Diabetologia 35:701-711
  • Glucagon-like peptide 1 is a product of proglucagon, a 180 amino acid peptide (Drucker, 1998, Diabetes 47:159-169).
  • the overall sequence of proglucagon contains the 29-amino acid sequence of glucagon, the 36 or 37 amino acid sequence of GLP-1 and the 34 amino acid sequence of glucagon-like peptide-2 (GLP-2), an intestinotrophic peptide.
  • GLP-1 has a number of functions. It is a physiological hormone that enhances the effect on insulin secretion in normal humans and is therefore an incretin hormone. In addition, GLP-1 also lowers glucagon concentrations, slows gastric emptying, stimulates (pro)insulin biosynthesis, and enhances insulin sensitivity (Hauck, 1997, Horm. Metab. Res. 47:1253-1258).
  • the peptide also enhances the ability for the ⁇ -cells to sense and respond to glucose in subjects with impaired glucose tolerance (Byrne, 1998, Eur. J. Clin. Invest. 28:72-78).
  • the insulinotropic effect of GLP-1 in humans increases the rate of glucose disappearance partly because of increased insulin levels and partly because of enhanced insulin sensitivity (D'Alessio, 1994, Eur. J. Clin. Invest. 28:72-78).
  • GLP-1 Active fragments of GLP-1 have been found to be GLP-1(7-36) (SEQ ID NO: 114) and GLP-1(7-37) (SEQ ID NO: 124).
  • GLP-1(9-36)amide SEQ ID NO: 125
  • DPP-IV dipeptidyl peptidase-IV
  • Exendins another group of peptides that lower blood glucose levels have some sequence similarity (53%) to GLP-1[7-36]NH 2 (SEQ ID NO: 114) (Goke et al., 1993, J. Biol. Chem. 268:19650-55).
  • the exendins are found in the venom of Helodermatidae or beaded lizards (Raufman, 1996, Reg. Peptides 61:1-18).
  • Exendin-3 is present in the venom of Heloderma horridum
  • the Mexican beaded lizard and exendin-4 is present in the venom of Heloderma suspectum , the Gila monster.
  • Exendin-4 differs from exendin-3 at just positions two and three.
  • exendin-4 The cDNA encoding the exendin-4 precursor protein, a 47 amino acid peptide fused to the amino terminus of exendin-4 has been cloned and sequenced (Pohl et al., 1998, J. Biol. Chem. 273:9778-9784 and WO98/35033). Both exendin-3 and exendin-4 stimulate an increase in cellular cAMP production in guinea pig pancreatic acinar cells by interacting with exendin receptors (Raufman, 1996, Reg. Peptides 61:1-18). Exendin-3 causes a biphasic increase in cellular cAMP production, but a monophasic increase in amylase release in pancreatic acinar cells. In contrast, exendin-4 causes a monophasic increase in cAMP production and does not alter amylase release.
  • Exendin-4 is a strong GLP-1 receptor agonist on isolated rat insulinoma cells (Goke et al., 1993, J. Biol. Chem. 268:19650-55). This is expected as the (His Ala) domain of GLP-1 recognised by DPP-IV is not present in exendin-4 (Goke et al., 1993, J. Biol. Chem. 268:19650-55).
  • exendin-3, exendin-4 and exendin agonists have been proposed for the treatment of diabetes mellitus, reducing gastric motility and delaying gastric emptying and the prevention of hyperglycemia (U.S. Pat. No. 5,424,286, WO98/05351) as well as for the reduction of food intake (WO98/30231).
  • lipophilic substituents to the molecule, e.g. as described in WO 99/43708 which discloses derivatives of exendin with just one lipophilic substituent attached to the C-terminal amino acid residue.
  • exendin analogues characterised by amino acid substitutions and/or C-terminal truncation of the native exendin-4 sequence. This approach is represented by the compounds of WO99/07404, WO 99/25727 and WO 99/25728.
  • WO99/07404 discloses exendin agonists having a general formula I that defines a peptide sequence of 39 amino acid residues with Gly Thr in positions 4-5, Ser Lys Gln in positions 11-13, Glu Glu Glu Ala Val Arg Leu in positions 15-21, Leu Lys Asn Gly Gly in positions 26-30, Ser Ser Gly Ala in positions 32-35, and wherein the remaining positions may be occupied by wild-type exendin amino acid residues or may be occupied by specified amino acid substitutions.
  • the formula I does not cover any exendin agonists or analogues having specific amino acid deletions and/or being conjugates as described herein, such as the novel compounds desPro 36 -exendin-4(1-39) (SEQ ID NO: 101), exendin-4(1-39)-K 6 (SEQ ID NO: 92) or desPro 36 -exendin-4(1-39)-K 6 (SEQ ID NO: 93).
  • WO 99/25727 discloses exendin agonists having a general formula I that defines a peptide sequence of from 28 to 38 amino acid residues with Gly in position 4 and Ala in position 18, and wherein the remaining positions may be occupied by wild-type exendin amino acid residues or may be occupied by specified amino acid substitutions.
  • Formula I does not comprise a peptide sequence having Ser as the C-terminal amino acid and exendin agonists or analogues having specific amino acid deletions and/or being conjugates as described herein, such as the novel compounds desPro 36 -exendin-4(1-39) (SEQ ID NO: 101), exendin-4(1-39)-K 6 (SEQ ID NO: 92) or desPro 36 -exendin-4(1-39)-K 6 (SEQ ID NO: 93).
  • formula II of WO 99/25727 defines a peptide sequence similar to formula I, but including exendin derivatives having a C(1-10)alkanoyl or cycloalkylalkanoyl substituent on lysine in position 27 or 28.
  • the compounds When treating inappropriate post-prandial blood glucose levels the compounds are administered frequently, for example one, two or three times a day.
  • exendin agonists having a general formula I that defines a peptide sequence of from 28 to 39 amino acid residues with fixed Ala in position 18, and wherein the remaining positions may be occupied by wild-type exendin amino acid residues or may be occupied by specified amino acid substitutions.
  • Said exendin agonists all correspond to a truncated exendin analogue having a varying degree of amino acid substitutions.
  • Peptide sequences of from 34 to 38 amino acid residues do not have Ser C-terminally.
  • a peptide sequence of 39 amino acid residues may have either Ser or Tyr C-terminally, but no further residues.
  • Exendin agonists or analogues having specific amino acid deletions and/or being conjugates according to the invention described herein are not comprised by formula I.
  • formula II defines a peptide sequence similar to formula I, but including exendin derivatives having a C(1-10)alkanoyl or cycloalkylalkanoyl substituent on lysine in position 27 or 28.
  • WO 99/46283 discloses peptide conjugates comprising a pharmacologically active peptide X and a stabilising peptide sequence Z of 4-20 amino acid residues covalently bound to X, where said conjugates are characterised in having an increased half-life compared to the half-life of X.
  • X may be exendin-4 or exendin-3.
  • the invention is directed to a peptide conjugate comprising a peptide X selected from the group consisting of
  • R 1 and R 2 are selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C 1-6 -alkyl, phenyl, and phenyl-methyl, wherein C 1-6 -alkyl is optionally substituted with from one to three substituents selected from halogen, hydroxy, amino, cyano, nitro, sulfono, and carboxy, and phenyl and phenyl-methyl is optionally substituted with from one to three substituents selected from C 1-6 -alkyl, C 2-6 -alkenyl, halogen, hydroxy, amino, cyano, nitro, sulfono, and carboxy, or R 1 and R 2 together with the carbon atom to which they are bound form a cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, or cycloheptyl ring, e.g. 2,4-diaminobutanoic acid and 2,3-diaminopropanoic acid, with the proviso that X is not exen
  • the peptide X is further characterised in being effective in improving glucose tolerance in a diabetic mammal.
  • the invention is directed to a novel variant of a parent exendin, wherein said parent exendin has an amino acid sequence having at least an 90% homology to exendin-4 and wherein said variant lowers the blood glucose level in a mammal, binds to a GLP-1 receptor and has at least one modification selected from the group consisting of (a) between one and five deletions at positions 34-38, and (b) contains a Lys at position 40 having a lipophilic substituent attached to the epsilon amino group of said lysine.
  • FIG. 1 shows the effect of Compound 1 (SEQ ID NO:101) (des Pro 36 -exendin-4(1-39)-NH 2 ) on blood glucose levels of mice, cf. Example 25.
  • FIG. 2 shows the effect of Compound 2 (SEQ ID NO:93) (des Pro 36 -exendin-4(1-39)-Lys 6 -NH 2 on the blood glucose levels of mice, cf. Example 25.
  • FIG. 3 shows the effect of Compound 5 (SEQ ID NO:89) (Gly 8 , Lys 37 (palmitoyl)-GLP1-(7-36)(Human)-(Lys) 7 -NH 2 on the blood glucose levels of mice, cf. Example 25.
  • FIG. 4 shows in vivo degradation kinetics in rabbits after i.v. injection of 1 ⁇ mol/kg of Compound 4 and Compound (iii), cf. Example 27.
  • FIG. 5 is a plot of AUC (area under the curve) values (mean ⁇ SEM) for Compounds 2, 14-16, 18 and 19 in an oral glucose tolerance test (OGTT), cf. Example 28.
  • FIG. 6 shows a synthetic cDNA constructed for heterolog expression of Compound 2 in yeast.
  • the new construct was designated pYES0010, cf. Example 20.
  • FIG. 7 is a plot of dose-response on GTT in db/db mice based on relative AUC 0-240 min values (mean ⁇ SEM) for Compound 2 and Compound (i), cf. Example 29.
  • FIG. 8 shows the effects of a maximal dose of Compound 2, i.e. 100 nmol/kg i.p., on the oral glucose tolerance test (OGTT) when administered up to 24 hours before the OGTT.
  • OGTT oral glucose tolerance test
  • the compounds of the present invention include hitherto unknown deletion variants of a parent exendin.
  • the novel compounds are believed to exhibit a stabilised alpha-helix structure with superior stability properties and unreduced or enhanced binding properties.
  • conjugation of the novel variants, modified GLP-1(7-36)-NH 2 (SEQ ID NO: 114), and modified GLP-1(7-37) (SEQ ID NO: 124) to specific short peptide sequences (Z) render stability to these compounds without compromising the pharmacological properties. These conjugations confer in vivo stability and hydrophilicity to the peptide molecule.
  • the Z is composed of amino-acid residues, and has alone no structural characteristics in terms of ⁇ -helix conformation.
  • NMR nuclear magnetic resonance
  • addition of Z dramatically alters the structural characteristics of some peptides as evidenced by the increased amount of ⁇ -helix conformation in the peptide.
  • circular dichroism demonstrated that a Z-modified (Gly 8 )-GLP-1 (SEQ ID NO: 87) had much more ⁇ -helix conformation than (Gly 8 )-GLP-1(SEQ ID NO: 87).
  • the exendin variant of the present invention is a variant of a parent exendin peptide having at least about 90% homology and most preferably at least about 95% to exendin-4, which have exendin activity, e.g., lowers the blood glucose level in a mammal and binds to a GLP-1 receptor.
  • the parent exendin peptide has an amino acid sequence which differs by five amino acids, preferably by four amino acids, more preferably by three amino acids, even more preferably by two amino acids, and still more preferably by one amino acid residue from the amino acid sequence of exendin-4(1-39) (SEQ ID NO: 102).
  • the exendin variant comprises between one and five deletions at positions 34-38.
  • the variant comprises between 1 and 4 deletions at positions 34-38, more preferably between 1 and 3 deletions at positions 36-38.
  • the parent exendin is exendin-4, and a preferred variant included as peptide X in the peptide conjugates herein has an amino acid sequence wherein 1, 2 or 3 of the Pro residues in positions 36, 37 and 38 have been deleted from the amino acid sequence of exendin-4 and preferably from the amino acid sequence of exendin-4(1-39) (SEQ ID NO: 102).
  • Proline is a rigid amino acid that may interfere with the effect of Z to stabilise the structure of the X peptide. Deletion of one, two or all of the proline amino acids in positions 36, 37 and 38 of the exendin backbone is therefore preferred in the peptide conjugates comprising a variant of a parent exendin according to the invention, as long as the efficacy of said conjugates as measured in, e.g. an oral glucose tolerance test (OGTT) in diabetic db/db mice, is not negatively affected.
  • OGTT oral glucose tolerance test
  • the variant comprises an additional residue at position 40, a lysine residue which comprises a lipophilic substituent bound to the epsilon amino group of lysine via an amide bond.
  • the lipophilic substituent may be the acyl group of a straight-chain or branched fatty acid or a straight-chain or branched alkane ⁇ , ⁇ -dicarboxylic acid.
  • the acyl group may have the formula CH 3 (CH 2 ) n CO—, wherein n is an integer from 4-38 and preferably from 4-24.
  • the acyl group is selected from the group consisting of CH 3 (CH 2 ) 6 CO—, CH 3 (CH 2 ) 8 CO—, CH 3 (CH 2 ) 10 CO—, CH 3 (CH 2 ) 12 CO—, CH 3 (CH 2 ) 14 CO—, CH 3 (CH 2 ) 16 CO—, CH 3 (CH 2 ) 18 CO—, CH 3 (CH 2 ) 20 CO—, and CH 3 (CH 2 ) 22 CO—.
  • the acyl group may have the formula HOOC(CH 2 ) m CO—, wherein n is an integer from 4-38 and preferably from 4-24.
  • the acyl group is selected from the group consisting of HOOC(CH 2 ) 14 CO—, HOOC(CH 2 ) 16 CO—, HOOC(CH 2 ) 18 CO—, HOOC(CH 2 ) 20 CO— and HOOC(CH 2 ) 22 CO—.
  • the lipophilic substituent is selected from the group consisting of tetradecanoyl, ⁇ -carboxynonadecanoyl, 7-deoxycholoyl, choloyl, palmitoyl and lithocholyl. In a most specific embodiment, the lipophilic substituent is palmitoyl.
  • the liphophilic substituent may have an NH group.
  • Specific embodiments include but are not limited to the formulae CH 3 (CH 2 ) a ((CH 2 ) b COOH)CHNHCO(CH 2 ) 2 CO— wherein a and b are integers and a+b is an integer of from 8 to 33, preferably from 12 to 28; CH 3 (CH 2 ) c CONHCH(COOH)(CH 2 ) 2 CO— wherein c is an integer of from 10 to 24; CH 3 (CH 2 ) d CONHCH(CH 2 ) 2 (COOH)CO— wherein d is an integer of from 8 to 24; COOH(CH 2 ) e CO— wherein e is an integer of from 8 to 24; —NHCH(COOH)(CH 2 ) 4 NHCO(CH 2 ) f CH 3 wherein f is an integer of from 8 to 18; —NHCH(COOH)(CH 2 ) 4 NHCOCH(CH 2 ) 2 COOH)
  • exendin variants having a lysine residue at position 40 carrying a lipophilic substituent optionally further comprise between one and five deletions, preferably between one and three deletions, at positions 34 to 39, preferably at positions 34-38, such as [des Ser 39 , Lys 40 (palmitoyl)]exendin-4(1-39) (SEQ ID NO: 107), [des Pro 36 , Lys 40 (palmitoyl)]exendin-4(1-39) (SEQ ID NO: 110) and [des Pro 36 , Lys 40 (palmitoyl)]exendin-4(1-40) (SEQ ID NO: 152).
  • Compound 1 des Pro 36 -exendin-4(1-39)-NH 2 (SEQ ID NO:101), des Pro 36 -exendin-4(1-40)-NH 2 (SEQ ID NO: 139), Compound 14: des Pro 36 , Pro 37 , Pro 38 -exendin-4(1-39)-NH 2 (SEQ ID NO: 132), des Pro 36 , Pro 37 , Pro 38 -exendin-4(1-40)-NH 2 (SEQ ID NO: 140), des Pro 36 , Pro 37 -exendin-4(1-39)-NH 2 (SEQ ID NO: 130), des Ala 35 -exendin-4(1-39)-NH 2 (SEQ ID NO:105), des Gly 34 -exendin-4(1-39)-NH 2 (SEQ ID NO:106), des Ser 39 -(Lys 40 (palmitoyl))exendin-4(1-39)-NH 2 (SEQ ID NO:107), des Gly 34 -(Lys 40 (palmitoyl))exendin-4(
  • a preferred modified GLP-1 included as peptide X in the peptide conjugates herein has an amino acid sequence of GLP-1 (7-36)-NH 2 (SEQ ID NO: 114) or GLP-1 (7-37) (SEQ ID NO: 124) having a substitution of glycine for alanine at position 8.
  • a preferred modified GLP-1 has an amino acid sequence of GLP-1 (7-36) (SEQ ID NO: 114) or GLP-1 (7-37) (SEQ ID NO: 124) having a substitution of glycine for alanine at position 8 and a lipophilic substituent, preferably palmitoyl, on one lysine residue at position 26, 34 or 37.
  • the lipophilic substituent is preferably attached to the epsilon amino group of said lysine and includes the specific embodiments described above for the exendin variants.
  • the modified GLP-1(7-36) (SEQ ID NO: 114) or GLP-1(7-37) (SEQ ID NO: 124) used as X in the conjugates of the invention may be those cited in WO 99/43707 and WO 98/08871 comprising a lipophilic substituent or, more preferably those GLP-1 analogues having a glycine substitution at position 8.
  • Preferred peptides X are
  • Gly 8 -GLP-1(7-36) (SEQ ID NO: 87);
  • Gly 8 -GLP-1(7-36)-Lys 37 (palmitoyl) (SEQ ID NO: 147).
  • the compounds of the invention having a lipophilic substituent would have a more protracted profile of action than the parent peptides as demonstrated for GLP-1 derivatives in WO 98/08871.
  • the peptide sequence Z may be bound to the C-terminal or the N-terminal of the peptide sequence, X, or two peptide sequences may be bound individually to both the C- and N-terminal of X.
  • the peptide sequence Z may be attached to either the C-terminal of the peptide X or to the N-terminal of the peptide X, or the C- and N-terminal of X may both be bound to each individual peptide sequence Z.
  • Z may be bound to the nitrogen atom on the side chain of lysine, histidine or arginine or a carbonyl function on the side chain of glutamic acid or aspartic acid anywhere within the peptide sequence X.
  • Z may be attached to X within the sequence and to the N- and/or C-terminal of X. Whether the sequence should be attached to the peptide sequence X at its C-terminal, at its N-terminal, or both, or within the peptide sequence X depends on the specific peptide X and can be easily determined by the person skilled in the art.
  • X is bound to Z via a peptide bond and preferably at the C-terminal of X.
  • One aspect of the invention is directed to a peptide conjugate comprising a peptide X which reduces the blood glucose level in a mammal, wherein X is (a) an exendin having at least 90% homology to exendin-4; (b) a variant of said exendin wherein said variant comprises a modification selected from the group consisting between One and five deletions at positions 34-39 and contains a Lys at position 40 having a lipophilic substituent; or (c) GLP-1 (7-36) (SEQ ID NO: 114) or GLP-1 (7-37) (SEQ ID NO: 124) having at least one modification selected from the group consisting of: (i) substitution of D-alanine, glycine or alpha-amino isobutyric acid (Aib) for alanine at position 8 and (ii) a lipophilic substituent; and Z, a peptide sequence of 4-20 amino acid units covalently bound to X, wherein each amino acid unit in said peptide sequence Z
  • R 1 and R 2 are selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C 1-6 -alkyl, phenyl, and phenyl-methyl, wherein C 1-6 -alkyl is optionally substituted with from one to three substituents selected from halogen, hydroxy, amino, cyano, nitro, sulfono, and carboxy, and phenyl and phenyl-methyl is optionally substituted with from one to three substituents selected from C 1-6 -alkyl, C 2-6 -alkenyl, halogen, hydroxy, amino, cyano, nitro, sulfono, and carboxy, or R 1 and R 2 together with the carbon atom to which they are bound form a cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, or cycloheptyl ring, e.g. 2,4-diaminobutanoic acid and 2,3-diaminopropanoic acid.
  • X binds to a
  • Z is typically a peptide sequence of 4-20 amino acid residues, e.g., in the range of 4-15, more preferably in the range of 4-10 in particular in the range of 4-7 amino acid residues, e.g., of 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or 10 amino acid residues, where 6 amino acid residues are preferred.
  • Z contains at least one Lys residue.
  • each of the amino acid residues in the peptide sequence Z are independently selected from the group consisting of Ala, Leu, Ser, Thr, Tyr, Asn, Gln, Asp, Glu, Lys, Arg, His, Met, Orn, diaminobutanoic acid and diaminopropanoic acid.
  • the amino acid residues are selected from Glu, Lys, and Met, especially Lys, or the amino acid residues are selected from the group consisting of Asn, Glu and Lys.
  • the above-mentioned amino acids may have either D- or L-configuration, but preferably the above-mentioned amino acids have an L-configuration.
  • Z contains at least 1 lysine residue or when Z is attached via a peptide bond to the N-terminal of said peptide X then Z has an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of Asn-(Glu)n wherein n is an integer from 3 to 7.
  • peptide sequence Z is:
  • Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:1), Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys, Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys, Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys, Lys-Lys-Xaa, Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Lys, Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Lys, Xaa-Lys-Lys-Xaa, Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Lys, Lys-Xaa-Lys-Xaa, Lys-Lys-Xaa-Xaa, Xaa-Xaa-Lys, Xaa-Xaa-Lys, Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Xaa, Xaa-Xaa-Lys, Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Xaa,
  • amino acid residues of Z may of course all be different or all be identical.
  • the amino acid residues in Z are selected from two or three different amino acids, or are identical amino acids.
  • suitable peptide sequences, wherein the amino acid residues in Z are identical are e.g., (Lys) n , wherein n is an integer in the range from 4 to 15, preferably in the range from 4 to 10, such as in the range from 4 to 8, e.g., in the range from about 4 to 7, e.g., Lys 4 (SEQ ID NO:1), Lys 5 (SEQ ID NO:2); Lys 6 (SEQ ID NO:8), Lys 7 (SEQ ID NO:30).
  • Preferred is (Lys) 6 bound via a peptide bond to the C-terminal of X.
  • Examples of suitable peptide sequences, wherein the amino acid residues in Z are selected from about two different amino acids are e.g., (Lys-Xaa) m or (Xaa-Lys) m , wherein m is an integer in the range from about 2 to 7, preferably in the range from 2 to 5, such as in the range from 2 to 4, e.g., 3, and Xaa is independently selected from the group consisting of Ser, Thr, Tyr, Asn, Gln, Asp, Glu, Arg, His, Orn, 2,4-diaminobutanoic acid, 2,3-diaminopropanoic acid and Met.
  • Such peptide sequences are e.g., (Lys-Xaa) 3 or (Xaa-Lys) 3 , wherein Xaa is as defined above, such as (Lys-Glu) 3 (SEQ ID NO:83) or (Glu-Lys) 3 (SEQ ID NO:84).
  • Suitable peptide sequences wherein the amino acid residues in Z are selected from about two amino acid residues are e.g., Lys p -Xaa q or Xaa p -Lys q , wherein p and q are integers in the range from 1 to 14, with the proviso that p+q is in the range from 4 to 15, preferably in the range from 4 to 10, such as in the range from 4 to 8, e.g., in the range from 4 to 6, e.g., 4, 5 or 6, and Xaa is independently selected from the group consisting of Ser, Thr, Tyr, Asn, Gln, Asp, Glu, Arg, His and Met.
  • Such peptide sequences are e.g., Lys 3 -Xaa 3 or Xaa 3 -Lys 3 , wherein Xaa is as defined above, such as Lys 3 -Glu 3 (SEQ ID NO:85) or Glu 3 -Lys 3 (SEQ ID NO:86).
  • More preferred Z sequences consists of a sequence of amino acid residues selected from Asn and Gln together with 4-7 amino acid residues selected from Glu and Asp, such as Asn-(Glu) 5 (SEQ ID NO: 141), Asn-(Glu) 6 (SEQ ID NO: 142), Gln-(Glu) 5 (SEQ ID NO: 143), Asn-(Asp) 5 (SEQ ID NO: 144), and Gln-(Asp) 5 (SEQ ID NO: 145), which is the N-terminal part of the peptide conjugate of the invention.
  • Asn-(Glu) 5 SEQ ID NO: 141
  • Asn-(Glu) 6 SEQ ID NO: 142
  • Gln-(Glu) 5 SEQ ID NO: 143
  • Asn-(Asp) 5 SEQ ID NO: 144
  • Gln-(Asp) 5 SEQ ID NO: 145
  • Suitable peptide sequences wherein the amino acid residues in Z are selected from three different amino acids are e.g., Xaa 1 -(Lys) x -(Xaa 2 ) y , Xaa 1 -(Xaa 1 ) x -(Lys) y , (Xaa 2 ) y -Xaa 1 , (Xaa 1 ) x (Lys) y -Xaa 2 , (Lys) x -Xaa 1 -(Xaa 2 ) y , (Xaa 1 ) x -Xaa 2 -(Lys) y , Xaa 1 ) x -Xaa 2 -(Lys) y , Xaa 1 -Lys-Xaa 2 -Lys, Xaa 1 -Lys-Xaa 2 -Lys, Xaa 1 Lys-X
  • the ratio between the minimum effective oral dose of said peptide conjugate and the minimum effective dose of the peptide, X is at least 1:5.
  • a most preferred embodiment of the invention is directed to a novel peptide conjugate comprising a peptide X being an agonist of GLP-1 and/or exendin-4 activity selected from the group consisting of
  • peptide conjugates of the invention might also be in the preferred amide (NH 2 ) or in the free acid (OH) form or in the form of a salt thereof.
  • exemplary peptide conjugates of the invention are
  • the conjugates are selected from the group consisting of Gly 8 -GLP-1-(7-36)(Human)-NH 2 (SEQ ID NO: 87), Gly 8 -GLP-1-(7-36)(Human)-Lys 6 -NH 2 (SEQ ID NO: 88), Gly 8 Lys 37 (palmitoyl)-GLP-1-(7-36)(Human)-Lys 7 -NH 2 (SEQ ID NO: 89), Gly 8 Lys 34 (palmitoyl)-GLP-1-(7-36)(Human)-Lys 6 -NH 2 (SEQ ID NO: 90), des Ser 39 -exendin-4(1-39)-Lys 6 -NH 2 (SEQ ID NO: 91), exendin-4(1-39)-Lys 6 -NH 2 (SEQ ID NO: 92), des Pro 36 -exendin-4(1-39)-Lys 6 -NH 2 (SEQ ID NO: 87), Gly 8
  • the provision of the peptide conjugates of the present invention enables blood glucose lowering peptides, such as GLP-1 and exendins and their active analogues to be administered orally.
  • the herein preferred terminal peptide fragments Z are chosen so as to induce an alpha-helical structure to the peptide X without significantly affecting the desired activity of X.
  • Said helical structure stabilises the peptide chain, e.g. against degradation, as evidenced by the increased half life of from 2 to 3 times of the conjugated peptide compared to the unconjugated peptide, cf. table 5 below.
  • the peptide sequence Z is the part of the peptide conjugate responsible for introducing of a certain structure into the molecule so that the minimum effective dose is lowered at least five fold.
  • the minimum effective dose is lowered at least ten fold, more preferably 25 fold, even more preferably 40 fold, and most preferably 50 fold. Therefore, the present invention also relates to the use of a peptide sequence (Z) as defined above for the preparation of a said peptide conjugate as defined above.
  • the invention also relates to a novel peptide conjugate comprising a peptide X as defined herein and wherein X reduces the blood glucose level in a mammal where the ratio between the minimum effective oral dose of said peptide conjugate and the minimum effective oral dose of the peptide X is at least 1:5.
  • the invention is directed to a method for stimulating insulin release in a mammal comprising administering an effective insulinotropic amount of the peptide conjugate of the present invention, a method of lowering blood glucose level in a mammal comprising administering an amount of the peptide conjugate of the present invention effective to lower blood glucose level in said mammal, a method of reducing gastric motility in a mammal in an amount of the peptide conjugate of the present invention effective to reduce gastric motility, a method of delaying gastric emptying in a mammal in an amount of the peptide conjugate of the present invention effective to delay gastric emptying, a method of inhibiting food uptake in a mammal in an amount of the peptide conjugate of the present invention effective to inhibit food uptake and a method of lowering plasma lipid level in a mammal comprising administering an amount of peptide conjugate of the present invention effective to lower plasma lipid level in said mammal.
  • the peptide conjugate of the present invention effective
  • the present invention also relates to methods for the preparation of said peptide conjugate, by means of recombinant DNA technology comprising the steps of (a) introducing a nucleic acid sequence encoding said conjugate into a host cell and (b) culturing said host cell and (c) isolating said conjugate from the culture or (a) culturing a recombinant host cell comprising a nucleic acid sequence encoding said conjugate under conditions permitting the production of said conjugate and (b) isolating said conjugate from the culture.
  • the method also relates to methods for the preparation of said peptide conjugate in which peptide X is obtained via recombinant DNA methods by isolating said peptide. X is then conjugated to Z which is attached to a solid support or has been prepared by solid phase synthetic methods. Furthermore, the invention relates to the preparation of the peptide conjugate of the present invention by peptide synthetic methods. Furthermore, the invention relates to the preparation of the peptide conjugate of the present invention by peptide synthetic methods.
  • the conjugates of the invention comprising an N-terminal sequence of from 33 to 39, preferably from 36 to 38, amino acid residues having a substantial homology to the native exendin-4 N-terminal sequence thought to be essential for receptor binding (insulinotropic activity) and a C-terminal sequence Z possess as a further advantage improved stability compared to native exendins and C-terminally truncated forms of exendin.
  • the GLP-1 peptide conjugate Compound 4 shows improved stability compared to the unconjugated Compound (iii).
  • compositions comprising the exendin variant or the peptide conjugate of the present invention in combination with a physiologically acceptable carrier.
  • Such compositions may be in a form adapted to oral, parenteral (including subcutaneous (s.c.), intravenous (i.v.), intramuscular (i.m.), epidural, direct brain and intraperitoneal (i.p.)), rectal, intratracheal, intranasal, dermal, vaginal, buccal, ocularly, or pulmonary administration, preferably in a form adapted to subcutaneous or oral administration, and such compositions may be prepared in a manner well-known to the person skilled in the art, e.g., as generally described in “Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences”, 17. Ed.
  • compositions may appear in conventional forms, for example, capsules, tablets, aerosols, topical application forms, liquid or semiliquid forms, such as solutions, suspensions, dispersions, emulsions, micelles or liposomes.
  • liquid compositions suitable for s.c. administration are administered.
  • the compositions of the present invention are administered subcutaneously.
  • the compositions of the present invention are administered orally, and in such cases one preferred administration form is a tablet or capsule.
  • the pharmaceutical carrier or diluent employed may be a conventional solid or liquid carrier.
  • solid carriers are lactose, terra alba, sucrose, cyclodextrin, talc, gelatin, agar, pectin, acacia, magnesium stearate, stearic acid to lower alkyl ethers of cellulose.
  • liquid carriers are syrup, peanut oil, olive oil, phospholipids, sterols, fatty acids, fatty acid amines, polyoxyethylene, isotonic buffer solutions and water.
  • the carrier or diluent may include any sustained release material known in the art, such as glyceryl monostearate or glyceryl distearate, alone or mixed with a wax.
  • the preparation may be tabletted, placed in a hard gelatin capsule in powder or pellet form or it can be in the form of a troche or lozenge.
  • the amount of solid carrier will vary widely but will usually be from about about 25 mg to about 1 g.
  • a typical tablet which may be prepared by conventional tabletting techniques may contain:
  • the preparation may be in the form of a syrup, emulsion, soft gelatin capsule or sterile injectable liquid such as an aqueous or non-aqueous liquid suspension or solution.
  • the preparation may contain a compound of the present invention, preferably a conjugate, dissolved or suspended in a liquid carrier, in particular, an aqueous carrier, for aerosol application.
  • a liquid carrier in particular, an aqueous carrier
  • the carrier may contain additives such as solubilizing agents, e.g., propylene glycol, surfactants such as bile acid salts or polyoxyethylene higher alcohol ethers, absorption enhancers such as lecithin (phosphatidylcholine) or cyclodextrin, or preservatives such as parabines.
  • the composition may also be in a form suited for local or systemic injection or infusion and may, as such, be formulated with sterile water or an isotonic saline or glucose solution.
  • the compositions may be sterilized by conventional sterilization techniques which are well known in the art.
  • the resulting aqueous solutions may be packaged for use or filtered under aseptic conditions and lyophilized, the lyophilized preparation being combined with the sterile aqueous solution prior to administration.
  • the formulation to be used for intravenous, subcutaneous and oral dosing will be a solution of the active compound in buffer.
  • the preparation may be produced immediately before use from active drug substance and sterile buffer solution.
  • One preferred method of sterilization may be by sterile filtration of a solution made immediately prior to use.
  • the composition may contain pharmaceutically acceptable auxiliary substances as required to approximate physiological conditions, such as buffering agents, tonicity adjusting agents and the like, for instance sodium acetate, sodium lactate, sodium chloride, potassium chloride, calcium chloride, etc.
  • the compounds of the invention possess valuable pharmacological properties, e.g. stability towards proteolytic enzymes.
  • pharmacological properties e.g. stability towards proteolytic enzymes.
  • In vitro stability studies with the present peptides and peptide conjugates in the presence of selected proteolytic enzymes show increased half lives of the novel peptides compared to prior art peptides.
  • the compounds of the invention exhibit considerably extended duration of action in vivo compared to GLP-1 and other GLP-1 agonists.
  • the compounds of the invention stimulate cAMP formation. This effect may be demonstrated in a cAMP assay, e.g. as described in WO 98/08871.
  • the peptide compounds of the present invention are agonists of GLP-1 activity and/or exendin-4 activity and improves blood glucose tolerance in diabetic mammals as determined by assays known in the art for a particular peptide. Examples of such an assay are described herein.
  • the invention also concerns the exendin variants and peptide conjugates as defined above for use in therapy, and the use of the peptide conjugates as defined above for the manufacture of a pharmaceutical composition for use in therapy, e.g., in the treatment of diabetes type 1 or type 2, obesity, eating disorders and insulin resistance syndrome.
  • the exendin variants and peptide conjugates of the invention may be used to stimulate insulin release, lower blood glucose level, reduce gastric motility, delay gastric emptying, inhibit food uptake, e.g. by suppression of appetite, or lower the plasma lipid level in a vertebrate or a mammal.
  • the novel compounds of the invention may also be used generally in the treatment of diabetes mellitus associated with a risk for hyperglycemia, i.e. where insulin sensitivity is decreased with stress, myocardia infection, stroke and infections, or in cases of insulin resistance during pregnancy.
  • novel compounds may also be used in the treatment of other types of diabetes, such as cases where diabetes may be secondary to other endocrine diseases such as acromegaly, Cushing's syndrome, pheochromocytoma, glucagonoma, somatostatinoma, primary aldosteronism, or secondary to administration of certain hormones causing hyperglycemia, or secondary to certain drugs (antihypertensive drugs, thiazide diuretics, preparations containing estrogen, psychoactive drugs, sympathomimetic agents.
  • the novel compounds of the invention may be used generally in the treatment of diseases and conditions associated with a risk for hypoglycemia, i.e.
  • endogenous glucose production is decreased, as following alcohol ingestion, or in cases where the sensitivity to insulin is increased in patients with hypopituitarism or primary adrenocortical insufficiency, or where insulin clearance is decreased as with progressive renal insufficiency.
  • WO 99/40788 relating to the inotropic and diuretic effects of exendin and GLP-1
  • WO 98/39022 relating to a method of sedating a mammalian subject having increased activation of the central or peripheral nervous system comprising administering exendin or GLP-1 or an agonist of exendin or GLP-1 to the subject to produce a sedative or anxiolytic effect on the subject
  • WO 93/18786 relating to the treatment of diabetes using GLP-1(7-37) (SEQ ID NO: 124) or GLP-1(7-36)amide (SEQ ID NO: 114) in a regimen which additionally comprises treatment with an oral hypoglycemic agent, such as sulfonylurea, producing a strong synergistic effect
  • WO 98/19698 relating to the use of GLP-1 analogs for the regulation of obesity
  • WO 98/08531 relating to the use of GLP-1 or analogs in a method of reducing mortality and
  • the compounds of the invention are suitable in a combination therapy with other antidiabetic agents, such as insulin, metformin, sulfonyl ureas and thiazolidinediones, or in combination therapy with other antiobesity agents, such as leptin, dexphenfluramine, amphetamin etc.
  • other antidiabetic agents such as insulin, metformin, sulfonyl ureas and thiazolidinediones
  • antiobesity agents such as leptin, dexphenfluramine, amphetamin etc.
  • a “peptide” as used herein is any compound produced by amide formation between a carboxyl group of one amino acid and an amino group of another.
  • the amide bonds in peptides may be called peptide bonds.
  • the word peptide usually applies to compounds whose amide bonds are formed between C-1 of one amino acid and N-2 of another (sometimes called eupeptide bonds), but it includes compounds with residues linked by other amide bonds (sometimes called isopeptide bonds).
  • Peptides with fewer than about 10-20 residues may also be called oligopeptides; those with more, polypeptides.
  • Polypeptides of specific sequence of more than about 50 residues are usually known as proteins.
  • a “natural polypeptide sequence” as used herein refers to a polypeptide sequence consisting of natural L-amino acid residues and which is capable of being expressed by a recombinant host cell.
  • the X compounds herein are all peptide sequences of 40 amino acid residues or less.
  • GLP-1 as used herein includes GLP-1(7-37)-OH(SEQ ID NO: 124), GLP-1(7-37)-NH 2 (SEQ ID NO: 124), GLP-1(7-36)-OH(SEQ ID NO: 114), and GLP-1(7-36)-NH 2 (SEQ ID NO: 114).
  • Antist refers to an endogenous substance or a drug that can interact with a receptor and initiate a physiological or a pharmacological response characteristic of that receptor (contraction, relaxation, secretion, enzyme activation, etc.).
  • Antagonist refers to a drug or a compound that opposes the physiological effects of another. At the receptor level, it is a chemical entity that opposes the receptor-associated responses normally induced by another bioactive agent.
  • Partial agonist refers to an agonist which is unable to induce maximal activation of a receptor population, regardless of the amount of drug applied.
  • a “partial agonist” may be termed “agonist with intermediate intrinsic efficacy” in a given tissue.
  • a partial agonist may antagonize the effect of a full agonist that acts on the same receptor.
  • Receptor refers to a molecule or a polymeric structure in or on a cell that specifically recognizes and binds a compound acting as a molecular messenger (neurotransmitter, hormone, lymphokine, lectin, drug, etc.).
  • exendin variant of the present invention is to be understood a variant of a parent exendin peptide having at least about 90% homology to exendin-4 and most preferably having at least about 95% homology to exendin-4(1-39) (SEQ ID NO: 102), which has exendin activity, e.g., lowers the blood glucose level in a mammal and binds to a GLP-1 receptor.
  • Exendin-4 refers to exendin-4(1-39) (SEQ ID NO: 102) the amino acid sequence of which is disclosed in U.S. Pat. No.
  • Salts include pharmaceutically acceptable salts, such as acid addition salts and basic salts.
  • acid addition salts are hydrochloride salts, sodium salts, hydrobromide salts, etc.
  • basic salts are salts where the cation is selected from alkali metals, such as sodium and potassium, alkaline earth metals, such as calcium, and ammonium ions + N(R 3 ) 3 (R 4 ), where R 3 and R 4 independently designates optionally substituted C 1-6 -alkyl, optionally substituted C 2-6 -alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted heteroaryl.
  • Other examples of pharmaceutically acceptable salts are; e.g., those described in “Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences” 17. Ed. Alfonso R. Gennaro (Ed.), Mark Publishing Company, Easton, Pa., U.S.A., 1985 and more recent editions, and in Encyclopedia of Pharmaceutical Technology.
  • exendin variants and the peptide conjugates of the invention may be prepared by methods known per se in the art.
  • the variants and the peptide sequences X and Z may be prepared by standard peptide-preparation techniques such as solution synthesis or Merrifield-type solid phase synthesis. It is believed that the Boc (tert.butyloxycarbonyl) as well as the Fmoc (9-fluorenylmethyloxycarbonyl) strategies are applicable.
  • the peptide conjugates of the invention may be prepared by solid phase synthesis by first constructing the peptide sequence Z using well-known standard protection, coupling and deprotection procedures, thereafter sequentially coupling the peptide sequence X on Z in a manner similar to the construction of Z, and finally cleaving off the entire peptide conjugate from the carrier.
  • This strategy yields a peptide conjugate, wherein the peptide sequence Z is covalently bound to the peptide X at the C-terminal carbonyl function of X.
  • the desired peptide conjugate is a peptide conjugate, wherein two stabilising sequences Z are covalently and independently bound to both the C- and the N-terminal of the peptide X
  • the above strategy is also applicable but, as will be understood by the person skilled in the art, before cleaving the off the C-terminal bound peptide conjugate from the solid support, it is necessary to sequentially couple the second peptide sequence Z to the N-terminal of X in a manner similar to the procedure described above.
  • This strategy may also be used to attach Z to the carbonyl function on the side chain of Glu or Asp.
  • peptide conjugates wherein the peptide sequence Z is covalently bound to the N-terminal nitrogen atom or covalently bound to the nitrogen atom on the side chain of Lys, Arg or His of X is analogous with the method described above, i.e. said peptide conjugates may be prepared by solid phase synthesis by first constructing the peptide sequence X using well-known standard protection, coupling and deprotection procedures, thereafter sequentially coupling the peptide sequence Z on X in a manner similar to the construction of X, and finally cleaving off the entire peptide conjugate from the carrier.
  • Another possible strategy is to prepare one or both of the two sequences X and Z (or parts thereof) separately by solution synthesis, solid phase synthesis, recombinant techniques, or enzymatic synthesis, followed by coupling of the two sequences by well-known segment condensation procedures, either in solution or using solid phase techniques or a combination thereof.
  • X may be prepared by recombinant DNA methods and Z may be prepared by solid phase synthesis.
  • the conjugation of X and Z may be carried out by using chemical ligation. This technique allows for the assembling of totally unprotected peptide segments in a highly specific manner (Liu et al., 1996, J. Am. Chem. Soc.
  • the conjugation can also be performed by protease-catalysed peptide bond formation, which offers a highly specific technique to combine totally unprotected peptide segments via a peptide bond (W. Kullmann, 1987, Enzymatic Peptide Synthesis, CRC Press, Boca Raton, Fla., pp. 41-59).
  • a combination of the above-mentioned strategies may be especially applicable where a modified peptide sequence, e.g., from a peptide X comprising isosteric bonds such as reduced peptide bonds, is to be coupled to a peptide sequence Z.
  • a modified peptide sequence e.g., from a peptide X comprising isosteric bonds such as reduced peptide bonds
  • suitable solid support materials are e.g., functionalised resins such as polystyrene, polyacrylamide, polydimethylacrylamide, polyethyleneglycol, cellulose, polyethylene, polyethyleneglycol grafted on polystyrene, latex, dynabeads, etc.
  • the C-terminal amino acid of the peptide sequence Z or the C-terminal amino acid of the peptide X is attached to the solid support material by means of a common linker such as 2,4-dimethoxy-4′-hydroxy-benzophenone, 4-(4-hydroxy-methyl-3-methoxyphenoxy)-butyric acid, 4-hydroxy-methyl-benzoic acid, 4-hydroxymethyl-phenoxyacetic acid, 3-(4-hydroxymethylphenoxy)propionic acid, and p-[(R,S)-a[1-(9H-fluoren-9-yl)methoxyformamido]-2,4-dimethoxybenzyl]-phenoxy-acetic acid.
  • a common linker such as 2,4-dimethoxy-4′-hydroxy-benzophenone, 4-(4-hydroxy-methyl-3-methoxyphenoxy)-butyric acid, 4-hydroxy-methyl-benzoic acid, 4-hydroxymethyl-phenoxyacetic acid, 3-(4-hydroxymethylphenoxy)propionic acid,
  • the variants and the peptide conjugates of the invention may be cleaved from the solid support material by means of an acid such as trifluoracetic acid, trifluoromethanesulfonic acid, hydrogen bromide, hydrogen chloride, hydrogen fluoride, etc. optionally in combination with one or more “scavengers” suitable for the purpose, e.g., ethanedithiol, triisopropylsilane, phenol, thioanisole, etc., or the peptide conjugate of the invention may be cleaved from the solid support by means of a base such as ammonia, hydrazine, an alkoxide, such as sodium ethoxide, an hydroxide, such as sodium hydroxide, etc.
  • an acid such as trifluoracetic acid, trifluoromethanesulfonic acid, hydrogen bromide, hydrogen chloride, hydrogen fluoride, etc.
  • scavengers suitable for the purpose, e.g., e
  • the present invention also relates to a method for the preparation of a pharmacologically active peptide conjugate, wherein Z is covalently bound to X, preferably via a peptide bond.
  • a method for the preparation of a peptide conjugate of formula I (X—Z) comprises the steps of:
  • a method for the preparation of a peptide conjugate of formula II (Z—X), comprises the steps of:
  • a method for the preparation of a peptide conjugate of formula III comprises the steps of:
  • the coupling, removal and cleavage steps are performed by methods known to the person skilled in the art taking into consideration the protection strategy and the selected solid phase material.
  • the Boc (tert.butyloxycarbonyl) as well as the Fmoc (9-fluorenylmethyloxycarbonyl) protection strategies are applicable and that peptide bonds may be formed using the various activation procedures known to the person skilled in the art, e.g., by reacting a C-terminal activated derivative (acid halide, acid anhydride, activated ester e.g., HObt-ester, etc.) of the appropriate amino acid or peptide with the amino group of the relevant amino acid or peptide as known to a person skilled in peptide chemistry.
  • a C-terminal activated derivative ascid halide, acid anhydride, activated ester e.g., HObt-ester, etc.
  • the peptides and peptide conjugates of the invention may also be prepared by means of recombinant DNA technology using general methods and principles known to the person skilled in the art.
  • a nucleic acid sequence encoding the peptides and peptide conjugates may be prepared synthetically by established standard methods, e.g., the phosphoamidite method described by S. L. Beaucage and M. H. Caruthers, Tetrahedron Letters 22, 1981, pp. 1859-1869, or the method described by Mathes et al., EMBO Journal 3, 1984, pp. 801-805.
  • oligonucleotides are synthesized, e.g., in an automatic DNA synthesizer, purified, annealed, ligated and cloned in suitable vectors.
  • the techniques used to isolate or clone a nucleic acid sequence encoding peptide X are known in the art and include isolation from genomic DNA, preparation from cDNA, or a combination thereof.
  • the cloning of the nucleic acid sequences of the present invention from such genomic DNA can be effected, e.g., by using the well known polymerase chain reaction (PCR) or antibody screening of expression libraries to detect cloned DNA fragments with shared structural features.
  • PCR polymerase chain reaction
  • nucleic acid amplification procedures such as ligase chain reaction (LCR), ligated activated transcription (LAT) and nucleic acid sequence-based amplification (NASBA) may be used. It can then be ligated to a nucleic acid sequence encoding Z.
  • LCR ligase chain reaction
  • LAT ligated activated transcription
  • NASBA nucleic acid sequence-based amplification
  • a recombinant expression vector which may be any vector which may conveniently be subjected to recombinant DNA procedures.
  • the choice of vector will often depend on the host cell into which it is to be introduced.
  • the vector may be an autonomously replicating vector, i.e., a vector which exists as an extrachromosomal entity, the replication of which is independent of chromosomal replication, e.g., a plasmid.
  • the vector may be one which, when introduced into a host cell, is integrated into the host cell genome and replicated together with the chromosome(s) into which it has been integrated.
  • the nucleic acid sequence encoding the peptides and peptide conjugates of the present invention should be operably connected to a suitable promoter sequence.
  • the promoter may be any nucleic acid sequence which shows transcriptional activity in the host cell of choice and may be derived from genes encoding proteins either homologous or heterologous to the host cell.
  • suitable promoters for directing the transcription of the nucleic acid sequence encoding said peptides and peptide conjugates in mammalian cells are the SV 40 promoter (Subramani et al., Mot. Cell Biol. 1, 1981, pp.
  • MT-1 metalothionein gene
  • RSV Rous sarcoma virus
  • CMV cytomegalovirus
  • BMV bovine papilloma virus promoter
  • a suitable promoter for use in insect cells is the polyhedrin promoter (Vasuvedan et al., FEBS Lett. 311, 1992, pp. 7-11).
  • suitable promoters for directing the transcription of the nucleic acid sequence encoding the peptides and peptide conjugates, especially in a bacterial host cell are the promoters obtained from the E. coli lac operon, the Streptomyces coelicolor agarase gene (dagA), the Bacillus subtilis levansucrase gene (sacB), the Bacillus licheniformis alpha-amylase gene (amyL), the Bacillus stearothermophilus maltogenic amylase gene (amyM), the Bacillus amyloliquefaciens alpha amylase gene (amyQ), the Bacillus licheniformis penicillinase gene (penP), the Bacillus subtilis xylA and xylB genes, and the prokaryotic beta-lactamase gene (Villa-Kamaroff et al., 1978, Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences USA 75:3727-3731), as well as the prok
  • promoters are described in “Useful proteins from recombinant bacteria” in Scientific American, 1980, 242:74-94; and in Sambrook et al., 1989, supra.
  • suitable promoters for directing the transcription of the nucleic acid sequence encoding the peptides and peptide conjugates in a filamentous fungal host cell are promoters obtained from the genes encoding Aspergillus orysae TAKA amylase, Rhizomucor miehei aspartic proteinase, Aspergillus niger neutral alpha-amylase, Aspergillus niger acid stable alpha-amylase, Aspergillus niger or Aspergillus awamori glucoamylase (glaA), Rhizomucor miehei lipase, Aspergillus oryzae alkaline protease, Aspergillus oryzae triose phosphate isomerase, Aspergillus nidul
  • promoters for use in filamentous fungal host cells are the TAKA amylase, NA2-tpi (a hybrid of the promoters from the genes encoding Aspergillus niger neutral a amylase and Aspergillus oryzae triose phosphate isomerase), and glaA promoters.
  • useful promoters are obtained from the Saccharomyces cerevisiae enolase (ENO-1) gene, the Saccharomyces cerevisiae galactokinase gene (GAL1), the Saccharomyces cerevisiae alcohol dehydrogenase/glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate dehydrogenase genes (ADH2/GAP), and the Saccharomyces cerevisiae 3-phosphoglycerate kinase gene.
  • ENO-1 Saccharomyces cerevisiae enolase
  • GAL1 Saccharomyces cerevisiae galactokinase gene
  • ADH2/GAP Saccharomyces cerevisiae alcohol dehydrogenase/glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate dehydrogenase genes
  • Saccharomyces cerevisiae 3-phosphoglycerate kinase gene Other useful promoters for yeast host cells are described by Romanos et al.,
  • the nucleic acid sequence encoding said peptides and peptide conjugates may also be operably connected to a suitable terminator, such as the human growth hormone terminator (Palmiter et al., op. cit.)
  • Preferred terminators for filamentous fungal host cells are obtained from the genes encoding Aspergillus oryzae TAKA amylase, Aspergillus niger glucoamylase, Aspergillus nidulans anthranilate synthase, Aspergillus niger alpha-glucosidase, and Fusarium oxysporum trypsin-like protease.
  • Preferred terminators for yeast host cells are obtained from the genes encoding Saccharomyces cerevisiae enolase, Saccharomyces cerevisiae cytochrome C (CYC1), or Saccharomyces cerevisiae glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate dehydrogenase.
  • Other useful terminators for yeast host cells are described by Romanos et al., 1992, supra.
  • the vector may further comprise elements such as polyadenylation signals (e.g., from SV 40 or the adenovirus 5 Elb region), transcriptional enhancer sequences (e.g., the SV 40 enhancer) and translational enhancer sequences (e.g., the ones encoding adenovirus VA RNAs).
  • polyadenylation signals e.g., from SV 40 or the adenovirus 5 Elb region
  • transcriptional enhancer sequences e.g., the SV 40 enhancer
  • translational enhancer sequences e.g., the ones encoding adenovirus VA RNAs.
  • preferred polyadenylation sequences for filamentous fungal host cells are obtained from the genes encoding Aspergillus oryzae TAKA amylase, Aspergillus niger glucoamylase, Aspergillus nidulans anthranilate synthase, and Aspergillus niger alpha-glucosi
  • the recombinant expression vector may further comprise a DNA sequence enabling the vector to replicate in the host cell in question.
  • a sequence when the host cell is a mammalian cell
  • a sequence is the SV 40 or polyoma origin of replication.
  • bacterial origins of replication are the origins of replication of plasmids pBR322, pUC19, pACYC177, pACYC184, pUB110, pE194, pTA1060, and pAM ⁇ 1.
  • Examples of origin of replications for use in a yeast host cell are the 2 micron origin of replication, the combination of CEN6 and ARS4, and the combination of CEN3 and ARS1.
  • the origin of replication may be one having a mutation to make its function temperature-sensitive in the host cell (see, e.g., Ehrlich, 1978, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 75:1433).
  • the vector may also comprise a selectable marker, e.g., a gene the product of which complements a defect in the host cell, such as the gene coding for dihydrofolate reductase (DHFR) or one which confers resistance to a drug, e.g., neomycin, geneticin, ampicillin, or hygromycin.
  • a selectable marker e.g., a gene the product of which complements a defect in the host cell, such as the gene coding for dihydrofolate reductase (DHFR) or one which confers resistance to a drug, e.g., neomycin, geneticin, ampicillin, or hygromycin.
  • DHFR dihydrofolate reductase
  • Suitable markers for yeast host cells are ADE2, HIS3, LEU2, LYS2, MET3, TRP1, and URA3.
  • a selectable marker for use in a filamentous fungal host cell may be selected from the group including, but not limited to, amdS (acetamidase), argB (ornithine carbamoyltransferase), bar (phosphinothricin acetyltransferase), hygB (hygromycin phosphotransferase), niaD (nitrate reductase), pyrG (orotidine-5′-phosphate decarboxylase), sC (sulfate adenyltransferase), trpC (anthranilate synthase), and glufosinate resistance markers, as well as equivalents from other species.
  • amdS acetamidase
  • argB ornithine carbamoyltransferase
  • bar phosphinothricin acetyltransferase
  • hygB hygromycin phosphotransferase
  • amdS and pyrG markers of Aspergillus nidulans or Aspergillus oryzae and the bar marker of Streptomyces hygroscopicus .
  • selection may be accomplished by cotransformation, e.g., as described in WO 91/17243, where the selectable marker is on a separate vector.
  • the host cell into which the expression vector is introduced may be any cell which is capable of producing the peptides and peptide conjugates and is may be a eukaryotic cell, such as invertebrate (insect) cells or vertebrate cells, e.g., Xenopus laevis oocytes or mammalian cells, in particular insect and mammalian cells.
  • suitable mammalian cell lines are the COS (e.g., ATCC CRL 1650), KIK (e.g., ATCC CRL 1632, ATCC CCL 10) or CHO (e.g., ATCC CCL 61) cell lines.
  • the host cell may also be a unicellular pathogen, e.g., a prokaryote, or a non-unicellular pathogen, e.g., a eukaryote.
  • Useful unicellular cells are bacterial cells such as gram positive bacteria including, but not limited to, a Bacillus cell, e.g., Bacillus alkalophilus, Bacillus amyloliquefaciens, Bacillus brevis, Bacillus circulans, Bacillus coagulans, Bacillus lautus, Bacillus lentus, Bacillus licheniformis, Bacillus megaterium, Bacillus stearothermophilus, Bacillus subtilis , and Bacillus, thuringiensis ; or a Streptomyces cell, e.g., Streptomyces lividans or Streptomyces murinus , or gram negative bacteria such as E.
  • a Bacillus cell e.g., Bacillus alkalophilus, Bacillus amyloliquefaciens, Bacillus brevis, Bacillus circulans, Bacillus coagulans, Bacillus lautus, Bacillus lentus, Bacillus
  • the bacterial host cell is a Bacillus lentus, Bacillus licheniformis, Bacillus stearothermophilus or Bacillus subtilis cell.
  • the transformation of a bacterial host cell may, for instance, be effected by protoplast transformation (see, e.g., Chang and Cohen, 1979, Molecular General Genetics 168:111-115), by using competent cells (see, e.g., Young and Spizizin, 1961, Journal of Bacteriology 81:823-829, or Dubnar and Davidoff Abelson, 1971, Journal of Molecular Biology 56:209-221), by electroporation (see, e.g., Shigekawa and Dower, 1988, Biotechniques 6:742-751), or by conjugation (see, e.g., Koehler and Thorne, 1987, Journal of Bacteriology 169:5771-5278).
  • the host cell may be a fungal cell.
  • the fungal host cell may also be a yeast cell.
  • yeast as used herein includes ascosporogenous yeast (Endomycetales), basidiosporogenous yeast, and yeast belonging to the Fungi Imperfecti (Blastomycetes).
  • the medium used to culture the cells may be any conventional medium suitable for growing mammalian cells, such as a serum-containing or serum-free medium containing appropriate supplements, or a suitable medium for growing insect, yeast or fungal cells. Suitable media are available from commercial suppliers or may be prepared according to published recipes (e.g., in catalogues of the American Type Culture Collection).
  • the invention also relates to a method for producing the exendin variants and peptide conjugates of the invention having a natural polypeptide sequence, comprising
  • the variants and peptide conjugates of the invention having a natural polypeptide sequence thus produced by the cells may then be recovered from the culture medium by conventional procedures including separating the host cells from the medium by centrifugation or filtration, precipitating the proteinaceous components of the supernatant or filtrate by means of a salt, e.g., ammonium sulphate, purification by a variety of chromatographic procedures, e.g., ion exchange chromatography, affinity chromatography, or the like.
  • a salt e.g., ammonium sulphate
  • purification by a variety of chromatographic procedures, e.g., ion exchange chromatography, affinity chromatography, or the like.
  • the lipophilic substituent(s) may be attached to the peptide of the present invention using procedures known in the art.
  • the lipophilic substituent may be attached by incorporating an amino acid with the lipophilic substituent already attached in the standard synthesis method (see, for example, synthesis of compound 7 in the Examples section).
  • the substituent may be attached after the peptide has been synthesized and isolated as, for example, described in WO98/08871.
  • Peptides are synthesized batchwise in a polyethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration using 9-fluorenylmethyloxycarbonyl (Fmoc) as the N- ⁇ -amino protecting group and suitable common protection groups for side-chain functionalities (Dryland et al., 1986, J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans. 1:125-137).
  • Fmoc 9-fluorenylmethyloxycarbonyl
  • Solvent DMF N,N-dimethylformamide, Riedel de-Häen, Germany
  • a strong cation exchange resin Lewatit S 100 MB/H strong acid, Bayer AG Leverkusen, Germany
  • Dhbt-OH 3,4-dihydro-3-hydroxy-4-oxo-1,2,3-benzotriazine
  • Solvent DCM diichloromethane, analytical grade, Riedel de-Häen, Germany
  • THF tetrahydrofuran, analytical grade, Riedel de-Häen, Germany
  • Fmoc-protected amino acids are purchased from MilliGen (UK) and from PerSeptive Biosystems GmbH Hamburg, Germany in suitable side-chain protected forms.
  • FmocLys(palmitoyl)-OH is purchased from Bachem (Switzerland).
  • HMPA (4-hydroxymethylphenoxy)acetic acid
  • HObt 1-hydroxybenzotriazole
  • DIC Coupling reagent diisopropylcarbodiimide
  • DCC dicyclohexylcarbodiimide
  • Peptides synthesized according to the Fmoc-strategy are synthesized on the following types of solid support using 0.05 M or higher concentrations of Fmoc-protected activated amino acid in DMF.
  • TentaGel S resins 0.22-0.31 mmol/g (TentaGel S-Ram, TentaGel S RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc; Rapp polymere, Germany).
  • Diisopropylethylamine (DIEA) is purchased from Aldrich, Germany, and ethylenediamine from Fluka, piperidine and pyridine from Riedel-de Häen, Frankfurt, Germany.
  • 4-(N,N-di-methylamino)pyridine (DMAP) is purchased from Fluka, Switzerland and used as a catalyst in coupling reactions involving symmetrical anhydrides.
  • Ethanedithiol is purchased from Riedel-de Häen, Frankfurt, Germany.
  • 3,4-dihydro-3-hydroxy-4-oxo-1,2,3-benzotriazine (Dhbt-OH) and 1-hydroxybenzotriazole (HObt) are obtained from Fluka, Switzerland.
  • the first amino acid is coupled as a symmetrical anhydride in DMF generated from the appropriate N- ⁇ -protected amino acid by means of DIC or DCC.
  • the following amino acids are coupled as preformed HObt esters made from appropriate N- ⁇ -protected amino acids and HObt by means of DIC in DMF. Acylations are checked by the ninhydrin test performed at 80° C. in order to prevent Fmoc deprotection during the test (Larsen, B. D. and Holm, A., 1994, Int. J. Peptide Protein Res. 43:1-9).
  • N - ⁇ -amino protected amino acid is dissolved in DCM and cooled to 0° C.
  • DCC or DIC (3 eq.) is added and the reaction continued for 10 min.
  • the solvent is removed in vacuo and the residue dissolved in DMF.
  • the DMF-solution is filtered in case of using DCC and immediately added to the resin followed by 0.1 eq. of DMAP.
  • Deprotection of the Fmoc group is performed by treatment with 20% piperidine in DMF (1 ⁇ 5 and 1 ⁇ 10 min.), followed by wash with DMF until no yellow colour (Dhbt-O-) could be detected after addition of Dhbt-OH to the drained DMF.
  • Method a Peptides are cleaved from the resins by treatment with 95% trifluoroacetic acid (TFA, Riedel-de Häen, Frankfurt, Germany)-water v/v or with 95% TFA and 5% ethanedithiol v/v at r.t. for 2 h.
  • TFA trifluoroacetic acid
  • the filtered resins are washed with 95% TFA-water and filtrates and washings are diluted by adding 10% acetic acid.
  • the resulting mixture is extracted 3 times with ether and finally freeze dried.
  • the crude freeze dried product is analysed by high-performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) and identified by mass spectrometry (MS).
  • TentaGel S-RAM resin (100-1000 mg, 0.22-0.31 mmol/g) is placed in a polyethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration.
  • the resin is swelled in DMF (5-10 ml), and the Fmoc group is removed according to the procedure described above.
  • the following amino acids according to the sequence are coupled as Fmoc-protected HObt esters (3 eq.) generated in situ by means of DIC as described above. The couplings are continued for 3 h, unless otherwise specified.
  • the resin is drained and washed with DMF (4 ⁇ 5-10 ml, 2 min each) in order to remove excess reagent.
  • Isocratic HPLC analysis is preformed on a Shimadzu system consisting of an LC-6A pump, an MERCK HITACHI L-4000 UV detector operated at 215 nm and a Rheodyne 7125 injection valve with a 20 ⁇ l loop.
  • the column used for isocratic analysis is a Spherisorb ODS-2 (100 ⁇ 3 mm; 5- ⁇ m particles) (MicroLab, Aarhus, Denmark).
  • HPLC analysis using gradients is performed on a MERCK-HITACHI L-6200 Intelligent pump, an MERCK HITACHI L-4000 UV detector operated at 215 nm and a Rheodyne 7125 injection valve with a 20 ⁇ l loop, or on a Waters 600 E instrument equipped with a Waters 996 photodiode array detector.
  • the columns used are a RescorceTM RPC 1 ml (Waters) or a LiChroCART 125-4, LiChrospher 100 RP-18 (5 ⁇ m) (Merck).
  • Buffer A is 0.1 vol % TFA in water and buffer B 90 vol % acetonitrile, 9.9 vol % water and 0.1 vol % TFA.
  • the buffers are pumped through the columns at a flow rate of 13-1.5 ml/min using either of the following gradients for peptide analysis 1) Linear gradient from 0%-100% B (30 min) or 2) 0% B (2 min) linear gradient from 0-50% B (23 min) 50-100% B (5 min).
  • Preparative HPLC purification is performed on a Waters 600 E instrument equipped with a Waters 996 photodiode array detector.
  • the column used is a Waters Delta-Pak C-18 15 ⁇ m, 100 ⁇ , 25 ⁇ 100 mm.
  • Gradient “2)” is used with a flow rate of 9 ml/min.
  • Mass spectra are obtained on a Finnigan Mat LCQ instrument equipped with an electrospray (ESI) probe (ES-MS) and on a TofSpec E, Fisons Instrument (MALDI-TOF) using ⁇ -cyano-p-hydroxycinnamic acid as matrix.
  • ESI electrospray
  • MALDI-TOF Fisons Instrument
  • TentaGel S-RAM resin (0.25 mmol/g, 1000 mg) is placed in a polyethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml).
  • the Fmoc group is removed according to the procedure described above, and the peptide according to the sequence is assembled as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-RAM resins”. After completion of the synthesis, the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo.
  • the peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid.
  • the crude peptide is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above.
  • the purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 90%.
  • the identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 17%.
  • TentaGel S-RAM resin (0.25 mmol/g, 1000 mg) is placed in a polyethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml).
  • the Fmoc group is removed according to the procedure described above, and the peptide according to the sequence is assembled as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-RAM resins”. After completion of the synthesis, the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo.
  • the peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze-dried from acetic acid.
  • the crude peptide is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above.
  • the purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 97%.
  • the identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 22%.
  • TentaGel S-RAM resin (0.25 mmol/g, 1000 mg) is placed in a polyethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml).
  • the Fmoc group is removed according to the procedure described above, and the peptide according to the sequence is assembled as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-RAM resins”. After completion of the synthesis, the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo.
  • the peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid.
  • the crude peptide is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above.
  • the purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 95%.
  • the identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 9%.
  • TentaGel S-RAM resin (0.25 mmol/g, 1500 mg) is placed in a polyethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml).
  • the Fmoc group is removed according to the procedure described above, and the peptide according to the sequence is assembled as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-RAM resins”. After completion of the synthesis, the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo.
  • the peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid.
  • the crude peptide is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above.
  • the purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 95%.
  • the identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 18.3%.
  • TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc resin (0.22 mmol/g, 1500 mg) is placed in a poly-ethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml).
  • the Fmoc group on the first lysine is removed as described above and the synthesis is continued until finishing the peptide sequence as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-Ram-Lys(Boc)Fmoc”.
  • the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo.
  • the peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid.
  • the crude freeze dried product is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above. The purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 95%.
  • the identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 22.1%.
  • TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc resin (0.22 mmol/g, 1000 mg) is placed in a poly-ethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml).
  • the Fmoc group on the first lysine is removed as described above and the synthesis is continued until finishing the peptide sequence as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-Ram-Lys(Boc)Fmoc”.
  • the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo.
  • the peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid.
  • the crude freeze dried product is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above. The purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 90%. The identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 20.5%.
  • TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc resin (0.22 mmol/g, 1000 mg) is placed in a polyethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml).
  • the Fmoc group on the first lysine is removed as described above and the synthesis is continued until finishing the peptide sequence as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-Ram-Lys(Boc)Fmoc”.
  • the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo.
  • the peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid.
  • the crude freeze dried product is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above. The purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 95%.
  • the identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 11.7%.
  • TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc resin (022 mmol/g, 2013 mg) is placed in a glass vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml).
  • the Fmoc group on the first lysine is removed as described above and the synthesis is continued until finishing the peptide sequence as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-Ram-Lys(Boc)Fmoc”.
  • the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo.
  • the peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid.
  • the crude freeze dried product is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above. The purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 90%. The identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 13%.
  • TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc resin (0.22 mmol/g, 1000 mg) is placed in a polyethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml).
  • the Fmoc group on the first lysine is removed as described above and the synthesis is continued until finishing the peptide sequence as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-Ram-Lys(Boc)Fmoc”.
  • the reagent Fmoc-Lys(palmitoyl)-OH is coupled in a slightly modified manner due to its poor solubility in DMF.
  • TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc resin (022 mmol/g, 1000 mg) is placed in a polyethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml).
  • the Fmoc group on the first lysine is removed as described above and the synthesis is continued until finishing the peptide sequence as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-Ram-Lys(Boc)Fmoc”.
  • the reagent Fmoc-Lys(palmitoyl)-OH is coupled in a slightly modified manner due to its poor solubility in DMF.
  • TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc resin (022 mmol/g, 1000 mg) is placed in a polyethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml).
  • the Fmoc group on the first lysine is removed as described above and the synthesis is continued until finishing the peptide sequence as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-Ram-Lys(Boc)Fmoc”.
  • the reagent Fmoc-Lys(palmitoyl)-OH is coupled in a slightly modified manner due to its poor solubility in DMF.
  • TentaGel S-RAM-Fmoc resin (0.23 mmol/g, 1000 mg) is placed in a poly-ethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml). The Fmoc group on the resin is removed as described above and the synthesis is continued until finishing the peptide sequence as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-Ram-Fmoc”. After completion of the synthesis, the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo.
  • DMF 3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each
  • DCM 3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each
  • diethyl ether 3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each
  • the peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid.
  • the crude freeze dried product is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above.
  • the purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 95%.
  • the identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 26%.
  • H-Lys 6 His-Gly-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Leu-Ser-Lys-Gln-Met-Glu-Glu-Glu-Ala-Val-Arg-Leu-Phe-Ile-Glu-Trp-Leu-Lys-Asn-Gly-Gly-Pro-Ser-Ser-Gly-Ala-Pro-Pro-Ser-(Lys) 6 -NH 2 (SEQ ID NO: 150)
  • TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc resin (0.22 mmol/g, 1000 mg) is placed in a poly-ethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml).
  • the Fmoc group on the first lysine is removed as described above and the synthesis is continued until finishing the peptide sequence as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-Ram-Lys(Boc)Fmoc”.
  • the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo.
  • the peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid.
  • the crude freeze dried product is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above. The purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 90%. The identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 32%.
  • TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc resin (022 mmol/g, 1000 mg) is placed in a poly-ethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml).
  • the Fmoc group on the first lysine is removed as described above and the synthesis is continued until finishing the peptide sequence as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-Ram-Lys(Boc)Fmoc”.
  • the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo.
  • the peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid.
  • the crude freeze dried product is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above. The purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 90%. The identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 18%.
  • TentaGel S-RAM-Fmoc resin (0.23 mmol/g, 1000 mg) is placed in a poly-ethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml). The Fmoc group on the resin is removed as described above and the synthesis is continued until finishing the peptide sequence as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-Ram-Fmoc”. After completion of the synthesis, the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo.
  • DMF 3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each
  • DCM 3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each
  • diethyl ether 3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each
  • the peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid.
  • the crude freeze dried product is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above.
  • the purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 98%.
  • the identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 15%.
  • TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc resin (0.22 mmol/g, 1000 mg) is placed in a poly-ethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml).
  • the Fmoc group on the first lysine is removed as described above and the synthesis is continued until finishing the peptide sequence as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-Ram-Lys(Boc)Fmoc”.
  • the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo.
  • the peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid.
  • the crude freeze dried product is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above. The purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 98%.
  • the identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 4.2%.
  • TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc resin (0.22 mmol/g, 1000 mg) is placed in a poly-ethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml).
  • the Fmoc group on the first lysine is removed as described above and the synthesis is continued until finishing the peptide sequence as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-Ram-Lys(Boc)Fmoc”.
  • the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo.
  • the peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid.
  • the crude freeze dried product is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above. The purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 95%.
  • the identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 2%.
  • TentaGel S-RAM-Fmoc resin (0.23 mmol/g, 1000 mg) is placed in a poly-ethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml). The Fmoc group on the resin is removed as described above and the synthesis is continued until finishing the peptide sequence as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-Ram-Fmoc”. After completion of the synthesis, the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo.
  • DMF 3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each
  • DCM 3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each
  • diethyl ether 3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each
  • the peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid.
  • the crude freeze dried product is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above.
  • the purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 95%.
  • the identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 11%.
  • TentaGel S-RAM-Fmoc resin (0.23 mmol/g, 1000 mg) is placed in a poly-ethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml). The Fmoc group on the resin is removed as described above and the synthesis is continued until finishing the peptide sequence as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-Ram-Fmoc”. After completion of the synthesis, the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo.
  • DMF 3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each
  • DCM 3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each
  • diethyl ether 3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each
  • the peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid.
  • the crude freeze dried product is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above.
  • the purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 94%.
  • the identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 17%.
  • TentaGel S-RAM-Fmoc resin (0.23 mmol/g, 1000 mg) is placed in a poly-ethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml). The Fmoc group on the resin is removed as described above and the synthesis is continued until finishing the peptide sequence as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-Ram-Fmoc”. After completion of the synthesis, the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo.
  • DMF 3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each
  • DCM 3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each
  • diethyl ether 3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each
  • the peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid.
  • the crude freeze dried product is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above.
  • the purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 90%.
  • the identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 9%.
  • TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc resin (0.22 mmol/g, 1000 mg) is placed in a poly-ethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml).
  • the Fmoc group on the first lysine is removed as described above and the synthesis is continued until finishing the peptide sequence as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-Ram-Lys(Boc)Fmoc”.
  • the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo.
  • the peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid.
  • the crude freeze dried product is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above. The purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 90%. The identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 10%.
  • TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc resin (0.22 mmol/g, 1000 mg) is placed in a poly-ethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml).
  • the Fmoc group on the first lysine is removed as described above and the synthesis is continued until finishing the peptide sequence as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-Ram-Lys(Boc)Fmoc”.
  • the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo.
  • the peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid.
  • the crude freeze dried product is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above. The purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 92%.
  • the identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 14%.
  • TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc resin (0.22 mmol/g, 1000 mg) is placed in a poly-ethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml).
  • the Fmoc group on the first lysine is removed as described above and the synthesis is continued until finishing the peptide sequence as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-Ram-Lys(Boc)Fmoc”.
  • the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3 ⁇ 5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo.
  • the peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid.
  • the crude freeze dried product is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above. The purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 97%.
  • the identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 19%.
  • a synthetic cDNA was constructed for heterolog expression in yeast.
  • the protein sequence encoding Compound 2 was back translated using a Saccharomyces cerevisiae codon usage table ( Saccharomyces Genome Database).
  • Saccharomyces Genome Database Saccharomyces Genome Database
  • the construct was inserted into HindIII and The EcoRI site of the pYES2 shuttle vector comprising an ampicilline resistance gene, and the new construct was designated pYES0010, cf. FIG. 6 .
  • pYES0010 was subsequently transformed into E. coli and subjected to ampicillin selection pressure. Positive clones were selected and sequenced.
  • Yeast were grown in YPD medium (1% yeast extract, 2% peptone, 2% glucose, and 0.004% adenine sulfate) at 30 C to saturation. 1 ml of culture was harvested for transformations. 2 ⁇ l of 10 mend carrier DNA was added and 1 ⁇ g of pYES0010 was added and mixed. 0.5 ml (45% PEG 4000, 1 M Li OAc, 0.5M EDTA and 1M Tris-HCl (pH 7.5) was added and mixed.
  • YPD medium 1% yeast extract, 2% peptone, 2% glucose, and 0.004% adenine sulfate
  • Transformants were cultivated in selective media (6.7% Yeast nitrogen base, 2% glucose, 20 ⁇ g/ml adenine, 20 ⁇ g/ml arginine, 29 ⁇ g/ml isoleucine, 20 ⁇ g/ml histidine, 60 ⁇ g/ml leucine, 20 ⁇ g/ml lysine, 20 ⁇ g/ml Tryptophan, 20 ⁇ g/ml methionine 50 ⁇ g/ml phenylalanine 150 ⁇ g/ml valine, 30 ⁇ g/ml Tyrosine) for 1.5 days.
  • selective media 6.7% Yeast nitrogen base, 2% glucose, 20 ⁇ g/ml adenine, 20 ⁇ g/ml arginine, 29 ⁇ g/ml isoleucine, 20 ⁇ g/ml histidine, 60 ⁇ g/ml leucine, 20 ⁇ g/ml lysine, 20 ⁇ g/ml Tryptophan,
  • the cells were harvested and resuspended in galactose induction medium (6.7% Yeast nitrogen base, 4% galactose, 20 ⁇ g/ml adenine, 20 ⁇ g/ml arginine, 29 ⁇ g/ml isoleucine, 20 ⁇ g/ml histidine, 60 ⁇ g/ml leucine, 20 ⁇ g/ml lysine, 20 ⁇ g/ml Tryptophan, 20 ⁇ g/ml methionine 50 ⁇ g/ml phenylalanine 150 ⁇ g/ml valine, 30 ⁇ g/ml Tyrosine for 1 day.
  • galactose induction medium (6.7% Yeast nitrogen base, 4% galactose, 20 ⁇ g/ml adenine, 20 ⁇ g/ml arginine, 29 ⁇ g/ml isoleucine, 20 ⁇ g/ml histidine, 60 ⁇ g/ml leucine,
  • the cells were harvested and homogenized in 10 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.5 containing protease inhibitors (Roche). The lysate was clarified centrifugation at 20.000 ⁇ g for 30 min. The supernatant was loaded onto a Superdex 12 HR 10/30 column (Amersham Pharmacia Biotech) equilibrated with 10 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.5. The column was eluted in 50 Mm ammonia bicarbonate buffer pH 8.0. Samples containing recombinant Compound 2 were pooled. The N-terminal methionine was removed by methionine aminopeptidase and the samples were further purified on a HPLC Column.
  • Compound 2 was eluted from the HPLC column with 0.10% trifluoroacetic acid in 20% to 80% Acetonitrile in 40 min.
  • Fixed dose formulations of peptide for intra venous injection are prepared by dissolving the peptide in sterile, isotonic saline, and storing the resulting solution in glass ampoules filled with inert gas under sterile conditions. Each dose of the peptide is stored dry in ampoules or capped vials filled with inert gas. Multi-dose formulations of peptide for intra venous injection are prepared by dissolving the peptide in sterile, isotonic saline, storing the resulting solution in capped vials, if necessary adding preservative (for instance 0.1% parahydroxybenzoate, 1% benzyl alcohol or 0.1% chlorocresole).
  • t 1/2 1 /k obs ln(2), where k obs is the apparent first-order rate constant for the observed degradation.
  • the LC-MS analysis was performed on an HP 1100 instrument consisting of an on-line degasser, a quaternary gradient pump, an auto sampler, a column oven, Hewlett Packard (Wilmington, Del., USA) in combination with a Quattro Ultima mass spectrometer from Micromass (Altrincham, UK). Both the LC and MS were controlled by MassLynx 33 software.
  • the LC separations prior to MS detection were performed on a Vydac 218MS52 (2.1 ⁇ 250 mm) column (Hesperia, Calif., USA).
  • the initial plasma volume was 1000 ⁇ l (37° C.). From the initial plasma volume, 100 ⁇ l was transferred to a 0.75 ml HPLC vial (used as blank), mixed with 560 ⁇ l extraction solution (MeCN:0.18 M ammonium carbonate pH 9.5 (6:94 v/v), 4 C) and extracted by Solid Phase Extraction using ASPEC XL4 Robot. A volume of 100 ⁇ l stock solution was added to the remaining 900 ⁇ l plasma, mixed thoroughly and incubated at 37 C (corresponding to an initial concentration of 10 ⁇ g of the test compounds/nil).
  • LC-MS analysis were performed on an HP 1100 series LC in combination with a Quattro Ultima II triple quadrupole MS instrument.
  • the samples were kept at 18° C. in the autosampler tray prior to injection of 10 ⁇ l.
  • the separations were performed at 30° C. on a Vydac 218MS52 (2.1 ⁇ 250 mm) LC column using a linear gradient from 15 to 50% B within 14 min. at a flow rate of 250 ⁇ l/min. 0.1% formic acid in water was used as mobile phase A and 0.1% formic acid in MeCN as mobile phase B.
  • the cone voltage for the analysis of compound (iii) and Compound 4 was set to 100 and 70 V, respectively.
  • the compounds of the invention possess blood glucose lowering properties. This was examined using Compound 5 to test the effect on blood glucose (BG) levels in the ob/ob mutant mice after intraperitoneal (i.p.) and peroral (p.o.) administration.
  • BG blood glucose
  • Compound 5 reduced BO levels in diabetic mice in a dose of 110 ⁇ g/mouse when administered i.p.
  • p.o. administration of Compound 5 elicited a similar decrease in BG levels in a dose of 1100 ⁇ g/mouse, but not at lower doses.
  • mice Forty female diabetic ob/ob mice (Ume ⁇ dot over (a) ⁇ strain, Bomholtgaard), which are obese due to a dominant mutant leptin (Tomita, T., Doull, V., Pollock, H. G, and Krizsan, D. 1992.
  • Compound 5 (batch nr. ZP 3.12 fraction 1-2. Purification) was synthesised by the Department of Chemistry, Zealand Pharmaceuticals. The peptide was dissolved in sterile isotonic NaCl shortly before dosing and given in a volume of 0.2 ml. The same solutions were used for both p.o. and i.p. administration. For each animal, a data log sheet was filled out at the time of each blood sampling.
  • mice were administered with Compound 5, and the maximum dose was 1100 ⁇ g/mouse and the lowest dose was 1.1 ⁇ g/mouse.
  • saline was administered p.o. and as positive control the test compound was given i.p. in a dose of 110 ⁇ g/mouse.
  • BG levels in non-fasted ob/ob mice were similar in all groups (individual group data not shown), but within groups, there was a great scatter on BG levels (BG range for all animals: 5.8-15.6 mM). Therefore, to correct for the varying degree of hyperglycemia, results are expressed as the relative difference from baseline (% control).
  • Intraperitoneal administration of 110 ⁇ g Compound 5 produced a sustained decrease in BG that reached nadir at 1-2 hrs after administration of the compound. No changes were observed in saline treated animals. In most groups (5/6), BG increased between 4 and 8 hrs after drug administration. Compound 5 reduced the BG levels in a dose of 110 ⁇ g/mouse when administered i.p.
  • Compound 5 effectively lowers BG levels in diabetic ob/ob mice following i.p. administration of 110 ⁇ g/mouse the compound. A similar effect is seen after 1100 ⁇ g/mouse of Compound 5 when given by the oral route. This suggests that the compound is absorbed from the gastrointestinal tract.
  • Des Pro 36 -exendin-4(1-39)-NH 2 (Compound 1, SEQ ID NO:101) and the same peptide, but with an additional sequence, Lys 6 , attached at the C-terminal, des Pro 36 -exendin-4(1-39)-Lys6-NH 2 (Compound 2, SEQ ID NO:93), Gly 8 -GLP1-(7-36)(Human)-NH 2 (Compound (ii), SEQ ID NO:87) and the same peptide, but with an additional sequence, Lys 6 , attached at the C-terminal, Gly 8 -GLP1-(7-36)(Human)-Lys 6 -NH 2 (Compound 4, SEQ ID NO:88) and Gly 8 Lys 37 (palmitoyl)-GLP1-(7-36)(Human)-Lys 7 -NH 2 (Compound 5, SEQ ID NO:89) are synthesized using methods described above.
  • the effect is most pronounced when Compound 1 is given intraperitoneally whereas the effect of 1000 ⁇ g po of Compound 2 is comparable to the effect of 100 ⁇ g ip of Compound 2.
  • the potency of Compound 1 (des Pro 36 -exendin-4(1-39)-NH 2 , SEQ ID NO:101) and Compound 2 (des Pro 36 -exendin-4(1-39)-Lys 6 -NH 2 , SEQ ID NO:93) when given intraperitoneally is shown to be very similar to exendin-4(1-39)-NH 2 (SEQ ID NO: 102) (Compound (i)) itself (data not given) administered in the same way.
  • Blank rat plasma in sodium heparin (5000 units/mL) were obtained from Harlan Sera Lab Ltd. (Loughborough, UK).
  • the LC/MS analysis was performed on a HP 1100 instrument consisting of an on-line degasser, a binary gradient pump, an auto sampler, a column oven, Hewlett Packard (Wilmington, Del., USA) in combination with a Quattro Ultima mass spectrometer from Micromass (Altrincham, UK) both the LC and MS were controlled by MassLynx 3.3 software.
  • the LC separations prior to MS detection were performed on a Vydac 218MS52 (2.1 ⁇ 250 mm) column (Hesperia, Calif., USA).
  • Sprague-Dawley rats weighing 250 to 350 g. were used for the experiment.
  • the rats were anaesthetised with Hypnorm®-Dormicum® s.c. and a catheter was inserted into the femoral artery for arterial blood sampling. An additional catheter was inserted into the duodenum via an incision in the ventricle. Before the experiment was started, the rats were allowed to recover for one week after the operation. The operated rats were conscious at the day of the experiment. In order to establish whether the intra duodenal catheters were situated in the duodenum, an autopsy was performed on the rats immediately after the experiment.
  • the drug containing plasma samples (400 ⁇ l) were loaded onto solid phase extraction columns preconditioned with 950 ⁇ l MeCN followed by 950 ⁇ l water. The columns were washed with 950 ⁇ l 2% TFA in water followed by an equal volume of 2% TFA in MeCN:water (20:78 v/v). The analytes were eluted with 500 ⁇ l 2% TFA in MeCN:water (60:38 v/v) and analysed by LC/MS.
  • the samples were kept at 18° C. in the auto sampler tray prior to injection of 20 to 50 ⁇ l onto the LC column (Vydac 218MS52 (2.1 ⁇ 250 mm).
  • the separations were performed at 30° C. using a flow rate of 250 ⁇ l/min and a gradient according to Table 1.
  • Compound Gradient Compound 4 Initial: 15% B, 0-14 min; 15-50% B, 14-15 min; 50-15% B and 15-20 min 15% B.
  • Compound (iii) Initial: 25% B, 1-1.5 min; 25-30% B, 1.5-10 min; 30-40% B, 10-10.5 min; 40-90% B, 11.5-12 min; 90-25% B, and 12-17 min 25% B.
  • the gradient used for the analysis of the test compounds using 0.1% formic acid in water or MeCN as Mobile phase A or B, respectively.
  • the plasma samples were analysed as described under materials and methods.
  • the concentration of Compound (iii) was below the detection limit (approx. 0.5 nM), the exact bioavailability could therefore not be estimated.
  • Compound 4 was detected in the plasma samples from two out of four rats after intra duodenal administration of 1.000 nmol/kg and in four out of five rats following administration of 10.000 nmol/kg.
  • Blank rabbit plasma in sodium heparin (5000 units/mL) were obtained from Harlan Sera Lab Ltd. (Loughborough, UK).
  • the LC/MS analysis was performed on a HP 1100 instrument consisting of an on-line degasser, a binary gradient pump, an auto sampler, a column oven, Hewlett Packard (Wilmington, Del., USA) in combination with a Quattro Ultima mass spectrometer from Micromass (Altrincham, UK) both the LC and MS were controlled by MassLynx 3.3 software.
  • the LC separations prior to MS detection were performed on a Vydac 218MS52 (2.1 ⁇ 250 mm) column (Hesperia, Calif., USA).
  • the blood was collected in EDTA containing ice-chilled tubes and immediately centrifuged at 4 C for 5 min (20.000 ⁇ g).
  • Plasma 250 ⁇ l was transferred to ice-chilled 0.75 ml PLC vials containing 250 ⁇ l extraction solution (MeCN: 0.18 M Ammonium Carbonate pH 9.5, 10:90 v/v).
  • the plasma samples were stored at ⁇ 20 C until SPE and LC/MS analysis.
  • the drug containing plasma samples (400 ⁇ l) are loaded onto OASISTM HLB (Compound 4) or ISOLUTETM (Compound (iii)) solid phase extraction columns preconditioned with 950 ⁇ l MeCN followed by 950 ⁇ l water. The columns are washed with 950 ⁇ l 2% TFA in water followed by an equal volume of 2% TFA in MeCN:water (20:78 v/v). The analytes are eluted with 500 ⁇ l 2% TFA in MeCN:water (60:38 v/v) and analysed by LC/MS.
  • OASISTM HLB Compound 4
  • ISOLUTETM Compound (iii)
  • Compound Gradient Compound 4 Initial: 15% B, 0-14 min; 15-50% B, 14-15 min; 50-15% B and 15-20 min 15% B.
  • Compound (iii) Initial: 25% B, 1-1.5 min; 25-30% B, 1.5-10 min; 30-40% B, 10-10.5 min; 40-90% B, 11.5-12 min; 90-25% B, and 12-17 min 25% B.
  • the gradient used for the analysis of the test compounds using 0.1% formic acid in water or MeCN as Mobile phase A or B, respectively.
  • the plasma samples were analysed as described under materials and methods and the plasma concentration (C pl ) plotted versus time in a semi log diagram.
  • the plasma concentration were followed for three hours in rabbits, whereas the limited blood volume of rats restricted the blood sampling in this specie to one hour.
  • the C pl vs. time curves from the individual rabbits were fitted to a two-compartment open model (figure not shown) using 1/y 2 weighted least squares in WinNonlin 3.1 (Pharsight Corp. (Mountain View, Calif.)).
  • the pharmacokinetic constants obtained from the data analysis are listed in Table 5 and the degradation kinetics in rabbit after i.v. injection of 1 ⁇ mol/kg of Compound 4 and Compound (iii), respectively, is shown in FIG. 4 .
  • mice Male diabetic db/db mice (M&B, Bomholdtgaard, LI. Skensved, Denmark) are used. This well-described mouse model has inherited malfunctions of the glucose metabolism due to a mutation in the leptin receptor. Like human patients with uncontrolled non-insulin demanding diabetes mellitus (NIDDM), homozygous db/db mice experience polydipsia, polyuria and glycosuria and gain weight during their first 3 months of life despite their hyperglycaemic stage. However, in this model the hyperglycaemia is associated with progressive pancreatic islet atrophy with possible ketosis and death at 6-8 months of age. Thus, attention should be paid to the progression and status of their disease state. Therefore, preferably only db/db mice less than 16 weeks old should be used for drug testing og GLP-1 analogues.
  • NIDDM non-insulin demanding diabetes mellitus
  • All animals are acclimatised for at least one week and handled daily for two days prior to the first oral glucose tolerance test (OGTT). Furthermore, to reduce stress-induced glucose excursions, the animals should be subjected to at least one OGTT without compound as described below prior to the experiment. Due to the great scatter of glucose tolerance among diabetic mice, the animals are stratified by an OGTT prior to their first use.
  • OGTT oral glucose tolerance test
  • Peptides are dissolved in 0.1 M phosphate-buffered saline (PBS) with 0.1% bovine albumin where pH is adjusted to 7.4 by adding 5 M NaOH. All solutions are prepared fresh on the morning immediately before the experiment. Vehicle treated animals are given PBS with 0.1% albumin alone.
  • PBS phosphate-buffered saline
  • i.p. intraperitoneal injection of vehicle or a dose of antidiabetic compound. Injection volume is 200 ⁇ l/50 g body weight in all groups.
  • Treatment (drug or vehicle) is considered the independent variable, AUC 0-240 min expressed as percent response in vehicle-treated time-control mice is the dependent variable, and drug dose is defined as covariate.
  • Post-hoc analysis is performed using Fisher's Least Significant test. Differences are considered significant at the 0.05 level.
  • Statistical analyses were performed using Statistica version 5.5 for Windows NT, StatSoft, Tulsa, Okla., U.S.A. The dose response curves shown in FIG. 5 clearly shows that all tested compounds exhibit a glucose lowering effect comparable to that of the reference drug.
  • FIG. 7 is a plot of AUC for Compound 2 and Compound (i) in an OGTT performed using the same experimental conditions as described in Example 28. The figure shows that the blood glucose lowering effect of Compound 2 is the same as the effect of the prior art compound (iii).
  • This experiment uses the maximal dose of 100 nmol/kg i.p. in db/db mice and otherwise, the same experimental conditions as described in Example 28 are used. Results are shown in FIG. 8 and the conclusion of the experiment is that the duration of action of Compound 2 is up to 18 hours in db/db mice.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
  • Endocrinology (AREA)
  • Gastroenterology & Hepatology (AREA)
  • Zoology (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Toxicology (AREA)
  • Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Diabetes (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Vascular Medicine (AREA)
  • Hematology (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Obesity (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Emergency Medicine (AREA)
  • Child & Adolescent Psychology (AREA)
  • Medicines That Contain Protein Lipid Enzymes And Other Medicines (AREA)
  • Peptides Or Proteins (AREA)

Abstract

Novel peptide agonists of GLP-1 activity useful for lowering blood glucose levels. The novel peptides comprise variants of the GLP-1 or the exendin-4 polypeptide sequence and are pharmacologically active and stable. These peptides are useful in the treatment of diseases that benefit from regulation of excess levels of blood glucose and/or regulation of gastric emptying, such as diabetes and eating disorders.

Description

    FIELD OF THE INVENTION
  • The present invention relates to novel peptide agonists of GLP-1 activity. More specifically the invention relates to novel peptides that lower blood glucose levels comprising variants of the exendin-4 polypeptide sequence and peptide conjugates comprising variants of the GLP-1 or the exendin-4 polypeptide sequences which are pharmacologically active and stable, and as agonists of GLP-1 activity are useful in the treatment of diseases that benefit from regulation of excess levels of blood glucose and/or regulation of gastric emptying, such as diabetes and eating disorders. The present invention also relates to methods of preparing said novel peptides, a composition, e.g., a pharmaceutical composition, comprising a peptide of the invention and a physiologically acceptable carrier, to said peptide for use in therapy, a method of treating a disorder and to the use of said peptide for the manufacture of a pharmaceutical composition for use in therapy.
    • BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • A number of hormones that lower blood glucose levels are released from the gastrointestinal mucosa in response to the presence and absorption of nutrients in the gut. These include gastrin, secretin, glucose-dependent insulinotropic polypeptide (GIP) and glucagon-like peptide-1 (GLP-1). The most potent substance known is GLP-1 (Ørskov, 1992, Diabetologia 35:701-711). Glucagon-like peptide 1 (GLP-1) is a product of proglucagon, a 180 amino acid peptide (Drucker, 1998, Diabetes 47:159-169). The overall sequence of proglucagon contains the 29-amino acid sequence of glucagon, the 36 or 37 amino acid sequence of GLP-1 and the 34 amino acid sequence of glucagon-like peptide-2 (GLP-2), an intestinotrophic peptide. GLP-1 has a number of functions. It is a physiological hormone that enhances the effect on insulin secretion in normal humans and is therefore an incretin hormone. In addition, GLP-1 also lowers glucagon concentrations, slows gastric emptying, stimulates (pro)insulin biosynthesis, and enhances insulin sensitivity (Hauck, 1997, Horm. Metab. Res. 47:1253-1258). The peptide also enhances the ability for the β-cells to sense and respond to glucose in subjects with impaired glucose tolerance (Byrne, 1998, Eur. J. Clin. Invest. 28:72-78). The insulinotropic effect of GLP-1 in humans increases the rate of glucose disappearance partly because of increased insulin levels and partly because of enhanced insulin sensitivity (D'Alessio, 1994, Eur. J. Clin. Invest. 28:72-78). This has placed GLP-1 as a promising agent for treatment for type II diabetes. Active fragments of GLP-1 have been found to be GLP-1(7-36) (SEQ ID NO: 114) and GLP-1(7-37) (SEQ ID NO: 124).
  • However, a major pharmacological problem with native GLP-1 is its short half-life. In humans and rats, GLP-1 is rapidly degraded by dipeptidyl peptidase-IV (DPP-IV) into GLP-1(9-36)amide (SEQ ID NO: 125), acting as an endogenous GLP-1 receptor antagonist (Deacon, 1998, Diabetologia 41:271-278). Several strategies circumventing this problem have been proposed, some using inhibitors of DPP-1V and others DPP-IV resistant analogues of GLP-1 (7-36)amide (SEQ ID NO: 114) (Deacon, 1998, Diabetologia 41:271-278; Deacon et al., 1998, Diabetes 47:764-769; Ritzel, 1998, J. Endocrinol. 159:93-102; U.S. Pat. No. 5,545,618; Pederson, 1998, Diabetes 47:1253-1258).
  • Exendins, another group of peptides that lower blood glucose levels have some sequence similarity (53%) to GLP-1[7-36]NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 114) (Goke et al., 1993, J. Biol. Chem. 268:19650-55). The exendins are found in the venom of Helodermatidae or beaded lizards (Raufman, 1996, Reg. Peptides 61:1-18). Exendin-3 is present in the venom of Heloderma horridum, the Mexican beaded lizard and exendin-4 is present in the venom of Heloderma suspectum, the Gila monster. Exendin-4 differs from exendin-3 at just positions two and three. The cDNA encoding the exendin-4 precursor protein, a 47 amino acid peptide fused to the amino terminus of exendin-4 has been cloned and sequenced (Pohl et al., 1998, J. Biol. Chem. 273:9778-9784 and WO98/35033). Both exendin-3 and exendin-4 stimulate an increase in cellular cAMP production in guinea pig pancreatic acinar cells by interacting with exendin receptors (Raufman, 1996, Reg. Peptides 61:1-18). Exendin-3 causes a biphasic increase in cellular cAMP production, but a monophasic increase in amylase release in pancreatic acinar cells. In contrast, exendin-4 causes a monophasic increase in cAMP production and does not alter amylase release.
  • Exendin-4 is a strong GLP-1 receptor agonist on isolated rat insulinoma cells (Goke et al., 1993, J. Biol. Chem. 268:19650-55). This is expected as the (His Ala) domain of GLP-1 recognised by DPP-IV is not present in exendin-4 (Goke et al., 1993, J. Biol. Chem. 268:19650-55). Binding of [125I]GLP-1 to the nucleus of the solitary tract was inhibited concentration-dependently by unlabelled GLP-1 and [Tyr39]exendin-4 (SEQ ID NO: 126) with Ki values of 3.5 and 9.4 nM respectively, and similar values are found in cell lines (Goke et al., 1995, Eur. J. Neurosci. 7:2294-2300 and Goke et al., 1993, J. Biol. Chem. 268:19650-55). Further, exendin-4 given systemically lowers blood glucose levels by 40% in diabetic db/db mice (WO99/07404). Recently, Grieg et al. (1999, Diabetologia 42:45-50) has shown a long lasting blood glucose lowering effect of once daily intraperitoneal injection of exendin-4 to diabetic ob/ob mice). U.S. Pat. No. 5,424,286 discloses that a considerable portion of the N-terminal sequence is essential in order to preserve insulinotropic activity (exendin-4(1-31) (SEQ ID NO: 127) and Y31-exendin-4(1-31)) (SEQ ID NO: 148) whereas an N-terminally truncated exendin (exendin-4(9-39) (SEQ ID NO: 128) has inhibitory properties.
  • The use of exendin-3, exendin-4 and exendin agonists has been proposed for the treatment of diabetes mellitus, reducing gastric motility and delaying gastric emptying and the prevention of hyperglycemia (U.S. Pat. No. 5,424,286, WO98/05351) as well as for the reduction of food intake (WO98/30231). There has been proposed ways of obtaining novel compounds by modifying the native exendin sequences. One way is to attach lipophilic substituents to the molecule, e.g. as described in WO 99/43708 which discloses derivatives of exendin with just one lipophilic substituent attached to the C-terminal amino acid residue.
  • A major approach has been to devise exendin analogues characterised by amino acid substitutions and/or C-terminal truncation of the native exendin-4 sequence. This approach is represented by the compounds of WO99/07404, WO 99/25727 and WO 99/25728. WO99/07404 discloses exendin agonists having a general formula I that defines a peptide sequence of 39 amino acid residues with Gly Thr in positions 4-5, Ser Lys Gln in positions 11-13, Glu Glu Glu Ala Val Arg Leu in positions 15-21, Leu Lys Asn Gly Gly in positions 26-30, Ser Ser Gly Ala in positions 32-35, and wherein the remaining positions may be occupied by wild-type exendin amino acid residues or may be occupied by specified amino acid substitutions. The formula I does not cover any exendin agonists or analogues having specific amino acid deletions and/or being conjugates as described herein, such as the novel compounds desPro36-exendin-4(1-39) (SEQ ID NO: 101), exendin-4(1-39)-K6 (SEQ ID NO: 92) or desPro36-exendin-4(1-39)-K6(SEQ ID NO: 93).
  • WO 99/25727 discloses exendin agonists having a general formula I that defines a peptide sequence of from 28 to 38 amino acid residues with Gly in position 4 and Ala in position 18, and wherein the remaining positions may be occupied by wild-type exendin amino acid residues or may be occupied by specified amino acid substitutions. Formula I does not comprise a peptide sequence having Ser as the C-terminal amino acid and exendin agonists or analogues having specific amino acid deletions and/or being conjugates as described herein, such as the novel compounds desPro36-exendin-4(1-39) (SEQ ID NO: 101), exendin-4(1-39)-K6 (SEQ ID NO: 92) or desPro36-exendin-4(1-39)-K6(SEQ ID NO: 93). Further, formula II of WO 99/25727 defines a peptide sequence similar to formula I, but including exendin derivatives having a C(1-10)alkanoyl or cycloalkylalkanoyl substituent on lysine in position 27 or 28.
  • When treating inappropriate post-prandial blood glucose levels the compounds are administered frequently, for example one, two or three times a day.
  • WO 99/25728 discloses exendin agonists having a general formula I that defines a peptide sequence of from 28 to 39 amino acid residues with fixed Ala in position 18, and wherein the remaining positions may be occupied by wild-type exendin amino acid residues or may be occupied by specified amino acid substitutions. Said exendin agonists all correspond to a truncated exendin analogue having a varying degree of amino acid substitutions. Peptide sequences of from 34 to 38 amino acid residues do not have Ser C-terminally. A peptide sequence of 39 amino acid residues may have either Ser or Tyr C-terminally, but no further residues. Exendin agonists or analogues having specific amino acid deletions and/or being conjugates according to the invention described herein are not comprised by formula I. Further, formula II defines a peptide sequence similar to formula I, but including exendin derivatives having a C(1-10)alkanoyl or cycloalkylalkanoyl substituent on lysine in position 27 or 28.
  • WO 99/46283 (published 16.09.99) discloses peptide conjugates comprising a pharmacologically active peptide X and a stabilising peptide sequence Z of 4-20 amino acid residues covalently bound to X, where said conjugates are characterised in having an increased half-life compared to the half-life of X. X may be exendin-4 or exendin-3.
    • OBJECTIVE OF THE INVENTION
  • There is a need for compounds that lower blood glucose levels in mammals, and are stable and effective. Therefore, it is an objective of the invention to provide novel compounds that lower blood glucose levels in mammals. Ideally, these should be effective when administered orally. It is a further object of the invention to provide novel peptide agonists of GLP-1 activity and/or exendin-4 activity. It is a still further purpose of the invention to provide peptide agonists of GLP-1 activity and/or exendin-4 activity having an increased half-life and/or a decreased clearance.
    • SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • The invention is directed to a peptide conjugate comprising a peptide X selected from the group consisting of
  • (a) an exendin having at least 90% homology to exendin-4;
    (b) a variant of said exendin wherein said variant comprises a modification selected from the group consisting of between one and five deletions at positions 34-39 and contains a Lys at position 40 having a lipophilic substituent; or
    (c) GLP-1 (7-36) (SEQ ID NO: 114) or GLP-1 (7-37) (SEQ ID NO: 124) having at least one modification selected from the group consisting of:
      • (i) substitution of D-alanine, glycine or alpha-amino isobutyric acid for alanine at position 8 and
      • (ii) a lipophilic substituent,
        and Z, a peptide sequence of 4-20 amino acid units covalently bound to said variant, wherein each amino acid unit in said peptide sequence, Z is selected from the group consisting of Ala, Leu, Ser, Thr, Tyr, Asn, Gln, Asp, Glu, Lys, Arg, His, Met, Orn, and amino acid units of the general formula I

  • —NH—C(R1)(R2)—C(═O)—  (I)
  • wherein R1 and R2 are selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C1-6-alkyl, phenyl, and phenyl-methyl, wherein C1-6-alkyl is optionally substituted with from one to three substituents selected from halogen, hydroxy, amino, cyano, nitro, sulfono, and carboxy, and phenyl and phenyl-methyl is optionally substituted with from one to three substituents selected from C1-6-alkyl, C2-6-alkenyl, halogen, hydroxy, amino, cyano, nitro, sulfono, and carboxy, or R1 and R2 together with the carbon atom to which they are bound form a cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, or cycloheptyl ring, e.g. 2,4-diaminobutanoic acid and 2,3-diaminopropanoic acid, with the proviso that X is not exendin-4 or exendin-3.
  • The peptide X is further characterised in being effective in improving glucose tolerance in a diabetic mammal.
  • Furthermore, the invention is directed to a novel variant of a parent exendin, wherein said parent exendin has an amino acid sequence having at least an 90% homology to exendin-4 and wherein said variant lowers the blood glucose level in a mammal, binds to a GLP-1 receptor and has at least one modification selected from the group consisting of (a) between one and five deletions at positions 34-38, and (b) contains a Lys at position 40 having a lipophilic substituent attached to the epsilon amino group of said lysine.
    • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES
  • FIG. 1 shows the effect of Compound 1 (SEQ ID NO:101) (des Pro36-exendin-4(1-39)-NH2) on blood glucose levels of mice, cf. Example 25.
  • FIG. 2 shows the effect of Compound 2 (SEQ ID NO:93) (des Pro36-exendin-4(1-39)-Lys6-NH2 on the blood glucose levels of mice, cf. Example 25.
  • FIG. 3 shows the effect of Compound 5 (SEQ ID NO:89) (Gly8, Lys37 (palmitoyl)-GLP1-(7-36)(Human)-(Lys)7-NH2 on the blood glucose levels of mice, cf. Example 25.
  • FIG. 4 shows in vivo degradation kinetics in rabbits after i.v. injection of 1 μmol/kg of Compound 4 and Compound (iii), cf. Example 27.
  • FIG. 5 is a plot of AUC (area under the curve) values (mean±SEM) for Compounds 2, 14-16, 18 and 19 in an oral glucose tolerance test (OGTT), cf. Example 28.
  • FIG. 6 shows a synthetic cDNA constructed for heterolog expression of Compound 2 in yeast. The new construct was designated pYES0010, cf. Example 20.
  • FIG. 7 is a plot of dose-response on GTT in db/db mice based on relative AUC0-240 min values (mean±SEM) for Compound 2 and Compound (i), cf. Example 29.
  • FIG. 8 shows the effects of a maximal dose of Compound 2, i.e. 100 nmol/kg i.p., on the oral glucose tolerance test (OGTT) when administered up to 24 hours before the OGTT.
    •  DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
  • The compounds of the present invention include hitherto unknown deletion variants of a parent exendin. In contrast to known substitution and/or truncation variants of exendin-4(1-39) the novel compounds are believed to exhibit a stabilised alpha-helix structure with superior stability properties and unreduced or enhanced binding properties. Moreover, conjugation of the novel variants, modified GLP-1(7-36)-NH2(SEQ ID NO: 114), and modified GLP-1(7-37) (SEQ ID NO: 124) to specific short peptide sequences (Z) render stability to these compounds without compromising the pharmacological properties. These conjugations confer in vivo stability and hydrophilicity to the peptide molecule. The Z is composed of amino-acid residues, and has alone no structural characteristics in terms of α-helix conformation. However, from studies using both circular dichroism and nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR) spectroscopy, addition of Z dramatically alters the structural characteristics of some peptides as evidenced by the increased amount of α-helix conformation in the peptide. For example, circular dichroism demonstrated that a Z-modified (Gly8)-GLP-1 (SEQ ID NO: 87) had much more α-helix conformation than (Gly8)-GLP-1(SEQ ID NO: 87). Together with the pharmacological results, the structural analyses suggest that Z is modifying the conformation of the peptide leading to higher enzyme-stability, but without losing its potency. Also the physical and chemical properties of peptides may be altered considerably by Z-modification with resulting impact on pharmacological formulation strategy.
    • Exendin Variants
  • The exendin variant of the present invention is a variant of a parent exendin peptide having at least about 90% homology and most preferably at least about 95% to exendin-4, which have exendin activity, e.g., lowers the blood glucose level in a mammal and binds to a GLP-1 receptor. In a preferred embodiment, the parent exendin peptide has an amino acid sequence which differs by five amino acids, preferably by four amino acids, more preferably by three amino acids, even more preferably by two amino acids, and still more preferably by one amino acid residue from the amino acid sequence of exendin-4(1-39) (SEQ ID NO: 102).
  • In one embodiment, the exendin variant comprises between one and five deletions at positions 34-38. Preferably the variant comprises between 1 and 4 deletions at positions 34-38, more preferably between 1 and 3 deletions at positions 36-38. Preferably the parent exendin is exendin-4, and a preferred variant included as peptide X in the peptide conjugates herein has an amino acid sequence wherein 1, 2 or 3 of the Pro residues in positions 36, 37 and 38 have been deleted from the amino acid sequence of exendin-4 and preferably from the amino acid sequence of exendin-4(1-39) (SEQ ID NO: 102).
  • Coupling of a Z sequence to the X peptide herein is believed to increase the stability of these compounds. Proline is a rigid amino acid that may interfere with the effect of Z to stabilise the structure of the X peptide. Deletion of one, two or all of the proline amino acids in positions 36, 37 and 38 of the exendin backbone is therefore preferred in the peptide conjugates comprising a variant of a parent exendin according to the invention, as long as the efficacy of said conjugates as measured in, e.g. an oral glucose tolerance test (OGTT) in diabetic db/db mice, is not negatively affected.
  • In another embodiment, the variant comprises an additional residue at position 40, a lysine residue which comprises a lipophilic substituent bound to the epsilon amino group of lysine via an amide bond. The lipophilic substituent may be the acyl group of a straight-chain or branched fatty acid or a straight-chain or branched alkane α,ω-dicarboxylic acid. The acyl group may have the formula CH3(CH2)nCO—, wherein n is an integer from 4-38 and preferably from 4-24. In a specific embodiment, the acyl group is selected from the group consisting of CH3(CH2)6CO—, CH3(CH2)8CO—, CH3(CH2)10CO—, CH3(CH2)12CO—, CH3(CH2)14CO—, CH3(CH2)16CO—, CH3(CH2)18CO—, CH3(CH2)20CO—, and CH3(CH2)22CO—. The acyl group may have the formula HOOC(CH2)mCO—, wherein n is an integer from 4-38 and preferably from 4-24. In a specific embodiment, the acyl group is selected from the group consisting of HOOC(CH2)14CO—, HOOC(CH2)16CO—, HOOC(CH2)18CO—, HOOC(CH2)20CO— and HOOC(CH2)22CO—. In a more specific embodiment, the lipophilic substituent is selected from the group consisting of tetradecanoyl, ω-carboxynonadecanoyl, 7-deoxycholoyl, choloyl, palmitoyl and lithocholyl. In a most specific embodiment, the lipophilic substituent is palmitoyl.
  • Alternatively, the liphophilic substituent may have an NH group. Specific embodiments include but are not limited to the formulae CH3(CH2)a((CH2)bCOOH)CHNHCO(CH2)2CO— wherein a and b are integers and a+b is an integer of from 8 to 33, preferably from 12 to 28; CH3(CH2)cCONHCH(COOH)(CH2)2CO— wherein c is an integer of from 10 to 24; CH3(CH2)dCONHCH(CH2)2(COOH)CO— wherein d is an integer of from 8 to 24; COOH(CH2)eCO— wherein e is an integer of from 8 to 24; —NHCH(COOH)(CH2)4NHCO(CH2)fCH3 wherein f is an integer of from 8 to 18; —NHCH(COOH)(CH2)4NHCOCH(CH2)2COOH)NHCO(CH2)gCH3 wherein g is an integer of from 10 to 16; and —NHCH(COOH)(CH2)4NHCO(CH2)2CH(COOH)NHCO(CH2)hCH3 wherein h is an integer of 0 or from 1 to 22 and preferably from 10 to 16.
  • The exendin variants having a lysine residue at position 40 carrying a lipophilic substituent optionally further comprise between one and five deletions, preferably between one and three deletions, at positions 34 to 39, preferably at positions 34-38, such as [des Ser39, Lys40 (palmitoyl)]exendin-4(1-39) (SEQ ID NO: 107), [des Pro36, Lys40 (palmitoyl)]exendin-4(1-39) (SEQ ID NO: 110) and [des Pro36, Lys40 (palmitoyl)]exendin-4(1-40) (SEQ ID NO: 152).
  • The variant may be in a most specific embodiment selected from the group consisting of:
  • Compound 1: des Pro36-exendin-4(1-39)-NH2 (SEQ ID NO:101),
    des Pro36-exendin-4(1-40)-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 139),
    Compound 14: des Pro36, Pro37, Pro38-exendin-4(1-39)-NH2(SEQ ID NO: 132),
    des Pro36, Pro37, Pro38-exendin-4(1-40)-NH2(SEQ ID NO: 140),
    des Pro36, Pro37-exendin-4(1-39)-NH2(SEQ ID NO: 130),
    des Ala35-exendin-4(1-39)-NH2 (SEQ ID NO:105),
    des Gly34-exendin-4(1-39)-NH2 (SEQ ID NO:106),
    des Ser39-(Lys40 (palmitoyl))exendin-4(1-39)-NH2 (SEQ ID NO:107),
    des Gly34-(Lys40 (palmitoyl))exendin-4(1-39)-NH2 (SEQ ID NO:108),
    des Ala35-(Lys40 (palmitoyl))exendin-4(1-39):NH2 (SEQ ID NO:109),
    des Pro36-(Lys40 (palmitoyl))exendin-4(1-39)-NH2 (SEQ ID NO:110), and the free acid thereof and a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
    • Modified GLP-1
  • A preferred modified GLP-1 included as peptide X in the peptide conjugates herein has an amino acid sequence of GLP-1 (7-36)-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 114) or GLP-1 (7-37) (SEQ ID NO: 124) having a substitution of glycine for alanine at position 8. Alternatively, a preferred modified GLP-1 has an amino acid sequence of GLP-1 (7-36) (SEQ ID NO: 114) or GLP-1 (7-37) (SEQ ID NO: 124) having a substitution of glycine for alanine at position 8 and a lipophilic substituent, preferably palmitoyl, on one lysine residue at position 26, 34 or 37. The lipophilic substituent is preferably attached to the epsilon amino group of said lysine and includes the specific embodiments described above for the exendin variants. The modified GLP-1(7-36) (SEQ ID NO: 114) or GLP-1(7-37) (SEQ ID NO: 124) used as X in the conjugates of the invention may be those cited in WO 99/43707 and WO 98/08871 comprising a lipophilic substituent or, more preferably those GLP-1 analogues having a glycine substitution at position 8. Preferred peptides X are
    • Gly8-GLP-1(7-36) (SEQ ID NO: 87); Gly8-GLP-1(7-37) (SEQ ID NO: 123), and
  • Gly8-GLP-1(7-36)-Lys37(palmitoyl) (SEQ ID NO: 147).
  • The compounds of the invention having a lipophilic substituent would have a more protracted profile of action than the parent peptides as demonstrated for GLP-1 derivatives in WO 98/08871.
    • Peptide Conjugates
  • The peptide sequence Z may be bound to the C-terminal or the N-terminal of the peptide sequence, X, or two peptide sequences may be bound individually to both the C- and N-terminal of X. In case the native peptide X possesses a free C-terminal carboxylic acid, the peptide sequence Z may be attached to either the C-terminal of the peptide X or to the N-terminal of the peptide X, or the C- and N-terminal of X may both be bound to each individual peptide sequence Z. Alternatively, Z may be bound to the nitrogen atom on the side chain of lysine, histidine or arginine or a carbonyl function on the side chain of glutamic acid or aspartic acid anywhere within the peptide sequence X. In one embodiment, Z may be attached to X within the sequence and to the N- and/or C-terminal of X. Whether the sequence should be attached to the peptide sequence X at its C-terminal, at its N-terminal, or both, or within the peptide sequence X depends on the specific peptide X and can be easily determined by the person skilled in the art. Preferably, X is bound to Z via a peptide bond and preferably at the C-terminal of X.
  • One aspect of the invention is directed to a peptide conjugate comprising a peptide X which reduces the blood glucose level in a mammal, wherein X is (a) an exendin having at least 90% homology to exendin-4; (b) a variant of said exendin wherein said variant comprises a modification selected from the group consisting between One and five deletions at positions 34-39 and contains a Lys at position 40 having a lipophilic substituent; or (c) GLP-1 (7-36) (SEQ ID NO: 114) or GLP-1 (7-37) (SEQ ID NO: 124) having at least one modification selected from the group consisting of: (i) substitution of D-alanine, glycine or alpha-amino isobutyric acid (Aib) for alanine at position 8 and (ii) a lipophilic substituent; and Z, a peptide sequence of 4-20 amino acid units covalently bound to X, wherein each amino acid unit in said peptide sequence Z is selected from the group consisting of Ala, Leu, Ser, Thr, Tyr, Asn, Gln, Asp, Glu, Lys, Arg, His, Met, Orn, and amino acid units of the general formula

  • —NH—C(R1)R2)—C(═O)—  (I)
  • wherein R1 and R2 are selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C1-6-alkyl, phenyl, and phenyl-methyl, wherein C1-6-alkyl is optionally substituted with from one to three substituents selected from halogen, hydroxy, amino, cyano, nitro, sulfono, and carboxy, and phenyl and phenyl-methyl is optionally substituted with from one to three substituents selected from C1-6-alkyl, C2-6-alkenyl, halogen, hydroxy, amino, cyano, nitro, sulfono, and carboxy, or R1 and R2 together with the carbon atom to which they are bound form a cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, or cycloheptyl ring, e.g. 2,4-diaminobutanoic acid and 2,3-diaminopropanoic acid. Preferably, X binds to a GLP-1 receptor and does not include exendin-4 or exendin-3.
  • Z is typically a peptide sequence of 4-20 amino acid residues, e.g., in the range of 4-15, more preferably in the range of 4-10 in particular in the range of 4-7 amino acid residues, e.g., of 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or 10 amino acid residues, where 6 amino acid residues are preferred. Preferably, Z contains at least one Lys residue. In a preferred embodiment of the invention each of the amino acid residues in the peptide sequence Z are independently selected from the group consisting of Ala, Leu, Ser, Thr, Tyr, Asn, Gln, Asp, Glu, Lys, Arg, His, Met, Orn, diaminobutanoic acid and diaminopropanoic acid. Preferably, the amino acid residues are selected from Glu, Lys, and Met, especially Lys, or the amino acid residues are selected from the group consisting of Asn, Glu and Lys. The above-mentioned amino acids may have either D- or L-configuration, but preferably the above-mentioned amino acids have an L-configuration. In a preferred embodiment of the invention Z contains at least 1 lysine residue or when Z is attached via a peptide bond to the N-terminal of said peptide X then Z has an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of Asn-(Glu)n wherein n is an integer from 3 to 7.
  • Thus, illustrative examples of the peptide sequence Z are:
  • Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:1), Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys, Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys, Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys, Lys-Lys-Lys-Xaa, Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Lys, Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Lys, Xaa-Lys-Lys-Xaa, Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Lys, Lys-Xaa-Lys-Xaa, Lys-Lys-Xaa-Xaa, Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Lys, Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Xaa, Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Xaa, Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa, Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa (SEQ ID NO:2), Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:3), Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:4), Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:5), Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:6), Lys-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys (SEQ ID NO:7), Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Xaa, Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys, Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys, Xaa-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys, Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys-Xaa, Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Lys, Lys-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Lys, Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Xaa, Lys-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Lys, Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Xaa, Lys-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Xaa, Lys-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa, Lys-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Xaa, Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Xaa, Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Lys, Xaa-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Xaa, Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Lys, Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Xaa, Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Lys, Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Lys, Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa, Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa, Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Xaa, Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Xaa, Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Lys, Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa (SEQ ID NO:8), Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:9), Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:10), Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:11), Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:12), Lys-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:13), Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys (SEQ ID NO:14), Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Xaa (SEQ ID NO:15), Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:16), Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:17), Xaa-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:18), Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys (SEQ ID NO:19), Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Xaa (SEQ ID NO:20), Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:21), Lys-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:22), Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys (SEQ ID NO:23), Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys-Xaa (SEQ ID NO:24), Lys-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:25), Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Lys (SEQ ID NO:26), Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Xaa (SEQ ID NO:27), Lys-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Lys (SEQ ID NO:28), Lys-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Xaa (SEQ ID NO:29), Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Xaa, Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys, Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys, Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys, Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys-Xaa, Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Lys, Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Lys, Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Xaa, Xaa-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Lys, Xaa-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Xaa, Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Xaa, Lys-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa, Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Xaa, Lys-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Xaa, Lys-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Lys, Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Xaa, Lys-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Xaa, Lys-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Lys, Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Xaa, Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Lys, Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Lys, Lys-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa, Lys-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa, Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Lys, Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Lys, Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Lys, Xaa-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa, Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Xaa, Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Xaa, Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Lys, Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Xaa, Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Xaa, Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Lys, Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Xaa, Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Lys, Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Lys, Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa, Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa, Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa, Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Xaa, Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Xaa, Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Lys, Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa, Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:30), Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:31), Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:32), Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:33), Lys-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:34), Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:35), Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys (SEQ ID NO:36), Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Xaa (SEQ ID NO:37), Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:38), Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:39), Xaa-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:40), Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:41), Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys (SEQ ID NO:42), Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:43), Lys-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:44), Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:45), Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys (SEQ ID NO:46), Lys-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:47), Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:48), Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys (SEQ ID NO:49), Lys-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:50), Lys-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Lys (SEQ ID NO:51), Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Lys (SEQ ID NO:52), Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:53), Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:54), Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:55), Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys (SEQ ID NO:56), Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:57), Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:58), Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys (SEQ ID NO:59), Xaa-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:60), Xaa-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Lys (SEQ ID NO:61), Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Xaa (SEQ ID NO:62), Xaa-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Xaa (SEQ ID NO:63), Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys-Xaa (SEQ ID NO:64), Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Lys (SEQ ID NO:65), Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Xaa (SEQ ID NO:66), Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Xaa (SEQ ID NO:67), Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Xaa (SEQ ID NO:68), Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Lys (SEQ ID NO:69), Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa (SEQ ID NO:70), Lys-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Lys (SEQ ID NO:71), Lys-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Xaa (SEQ ID NO:72), Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Xaa (SEQ ID NO:73), Lys-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Lys (SEQ ID NO:74), Lys-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:75), Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Xaa (SEQ ID NO:76), Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Lys (SEQ ID NO:77), Lys-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Lys (SEQ ID NO:78), Lys-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:79), Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys (SEQ ID NO:80), Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:81), Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys (SEQ ID NO:82), Lys-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Lys, Lys-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Lys, Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Lys, Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Lys, Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Lys, Xaa-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Lys, Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Lys, Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Lys, Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Lys, Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Lys, Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Lys, Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Lys, Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Xaa-Lys, Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Lys-Lys, Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Lys-Lys, Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Lys, Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Lys, Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Lys, Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Lys, Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Lys, Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Lys, Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Lys, Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa, Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Xaa, Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa, Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa, Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Lys-Xaa, Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa-Xaa, wherein each Xaa is independently selected from the group consisting of Ala, Leu, Ser, Thr, Tyr, Asn, Gln, Asp, Glu, Arg, His, Met, Orn, and amino acids of the formula I as defined herein, e.g., Dbu or Dpr.
  • As indicated above, the amino acid residues of Z may of course all be different or all be identical. However, in interesting embodiments of the present invention, the amino acid residues in Z are selected from two or three different amino acids, or are identical amino acids. Examples of suitable peptide sequences, wherein the amino acid residues in Z are identical are e.g., (Lys)n, wherein n is an integer in the range from 4 to 15, preferably in the range from 4 to 10, such as in the range from 4 to 8, e.g., in the range from about 4 to 7, e.g., Lys4 (SEQ ID NO:1), Lys5 (SEQ ID NO:2); Lys6 (SEQ ID NO:8), Lys7 (SEQ ID NO:30). Preferred is (Lys)6 bound via a peptide bond to the C-terminal of X.
  • Examples of suitable peptide sequences, wherein the amino acid residues in Z are selected from about two different amino acids are e.g., (Lys-Xaa)m or (Xaa-Lys)m, wherein m is an integer in the range from about 2 to 7, preferably in the range from 2 to 5, such as in the range from 2 to 4, e.g., 3, and Xaa is independently selected from the group consisting of Ser, Thr, Tyr, Asn, Gln, Asp, Glu, Arg, His, Orn, 2,4-diaminobutanoic acid, 2,3-diaminopropanoic acid and Met. More preferably such peptide sequences are e.g., (Lys-Xaa)3 or (Xaa-Lys)3, wherein Xaa is as defined above, such as (Lys-Glu)3 (SEQ ID NO:83) or (Glu-Lys)3 (SEQ ID NO:84). Other examples of suitable peptide sequences, wherein the amino acid residues in Z are selected from about two amino acid residues are e.g., Lysp-Xaaq or Xaap-Lysq, wherein p and q are integers in the range from 1 to 14, with the proviso that p+q is in the range from 4 to 15, preferably in the range from 4 to 10, such as in the range from 4 to 8, e.g., in the range from 4 to 6, e.g., 4, 5 or 6, and Xaa is independently selected from the group consisting of Ser, Thr, Tyr, Asn, Gln, Asp, Glu, Arg, His and Met. More preferably such peptide sequences are e.g., Lys3-Xaa3 or Xaa3-Lys3, wherein Xaa is as defined above, such as Lys3-Glu3 (SEQ ID NO:85) or Glu3-Lys3 (SEQ ID NO:86). More preferred Z sequences consists of a sequence of amino acid residues selected from Asn and Gln together with 4-7 amino acid residues selected from Glu and Asp, such as Asn-(Glu)5(SEQ ID NO: 141), Asn-(Glu)6(SEQ ID NO: 142), Gln-(Glu)5(SEQ ID NO: 143), Asn-(Asp)5(SEQ ID NO: 144), and Gln-(Asp)5(SEQ ID NO: 145), which is the N-terminal part of the peptide conjugate of the invention.
  • Examples of suitable peptide sequences, wherein the amino acid residues in Z are selected from three different amino acids are e.g., Xaa1-(Lys)x-(Xaa2)y, Xaa1-(Xaa1)x-(Lys)y, (Xaa2)y-Xaa1, (Xaa1)x(Lys)y-Xaa2, (Lys)x-Xaa1-(Xaa2)y, (Xaa1)x-Xaa2-(Lys)y, Xaa1-Lys-Xaa2-Lys, Xaa1-Lys-Xaa2-Lys-Xaa2, Xaa1Lys-Xaa2-Lys-Xaa2-Lys, Xaa1-Xaa2-Lys-Xaa2, Xaa1-Xaa2-Lys-Xaa2-Lys, Xaa1-Xaa1-Lys-Xaa2-Lys-Xaa2, Lys-Xaa2-Lys-Xaa1, Lys-Xaa2-Lys-Xaa2-Xaa1, Lys-Xaa2-Lys-Xaa2-Lys-Xaa1, Xaa2-Lys-Xaa2-Xaa1, Xaa2-Lys-Xaa2-Lys-Xaa1, Xaa2-Lys-Xaa1-Lys-Xaa2-Xaa1, etc., wherein x and y are integers in the range from about 1 to 5 with the proviso that x+y is at the most 6, and Xaa1 and Xaa2 is independently selected from about the group consisting of Ala, Leu, Ser, Thr, Tyr, Asn, Gln, Asp, Glu, Arg, His, Met, Orn, 2,3-diaminopropanoic acid, 2,4-diaminobutanoic acid and amino acids of the formula I as defined herein.
  • In preferred embodiments of the invention the ratio between the minimum effective oral dose of said peptide conjugate and the minimum effective dose of the peptide, X is at least 1:5.
  • A most preferred embodiment of the invention is directed to a novel peptide conjugate comprising a peptide X being an agonist of GLP-1 and/or exendin-4 activity selected from the group consisting of
  • des Pro36-exendin-4(1-39)-NH2 (SEQ ID NO:101),
    des Pro36-exendin-4(1-40)-NH2(SEQ ID NO: 139),
    des Pro36-des Pro37-exendin-4(1-39)-N1-1(SEQ ID NO: 130),
    des Pro36-des Pro37-des Pro38-exendin-4(1-39)-NH2(SEQ ID NO: 132),
    des Pro36-des Pro37-des Pro33-exendin-4(1-40)-NH2(SEQ ID NO: 140),
    des Ala35-exendin-4(1-39)-NH2 (SEQ ID NO:105),
    des Gly34-exendin-4(1-39)-NH2 (SEQ ID NO:106),
    des Gly34-(Lys40 (palmitoyl))exendin-4(1-39)-NH2 (SEQ ID NO:108),
    des Ala35-(Lys (palmitoyl))exendin-4(1-39)-NH2 (SEQ ID NO:109),
    des Pro36-(Lys40 (palmitoyl))exendin-4(1-39)-NH2 (SEQ ID NO:110),
  • Compound (iii) Gly8-GLP-1 (7-36)-NH2(SEQ ID NO: 87), Gly8-GLP-1(7-37) (SEQ ID NO: 123), and Gly8-GLP-1(7-36)-Lys37 (palmitoyl)-NH2(SEQ ID NO: 147), and being C-terminally bound via a peptide bond to a peptide sequence Z selected from the group consisting of (Lys)n where n is an integer from 4 to 8, preferably n is 6.
  • It should be understood that the peptide conjugates of the invention might also be in the preferred amide (NH2) or in the free acid (OH) form or in the form of a salt thereof. Exemplary peptide conjugates of the invention are
    • Gly8-GLP-1 (7-36)-Lys6-NH2 (SEQ ID NO:88),
  • (Gly8,Lys37 (palmitoyl)-GLP-1(7-36)(Human)-Lys7-NH2 (SEQ ID NO:89),
    des Ser39-exendin-4(1-39)-(Lys)6-NH2 (SEQ ID NO:91),
    exendin-4(1-39)-Lys6-NH2 (SEQ ID NO:92),
    des Pro36-exendin-4(1-39)-Lys6-NH2 (SEQ ID NO:93),
    des Ala35-exendin-4(1-39)-Lys6-NH2 (SEQ ID NO:94),
    des Gly34-exendin-4(1-39)-Lys6-NH2 (SEQ ID NO:95),
    des Ser39-(Lys40 (palmitoyl))exendin-4(1-39)-Lys7-NH2 (SEQ ID NO:96),
    des Gly34-(Lys40 (palmitoyl))exendin-4(1-39)-Lys7-NH2 (SEQ ID NO:97),
    des Ala35-(Lys40 (palmitoyl))exendin-4(1-39)-Lys7-NH2 (SEQ ID NO:98),
    des Pro36-(Lys40 (palmitoyl))exendin-4(1-39)-Lys7-NH2 (SEQ ID NO:99),
    Lys40 (palmitoyl)exendin-4(1-39)-Lys7-NH2 (SEQ ID NO:100),
    des Pro36, Pro37-exendin-4(1-39)-Lys6-NH2(SEQ ID NO: 131),
    Lys6-des Pro36, Pro37, Pro3 8 -exendin-4(1-39)-NH2(SEQ ID NO: 134)
    Asn(Glu)5-des Pro36, Pro37, Pro3 8 -exendin-4(1-39)-NH2(SEQ ID NO: 137),
    Lys6-des Pro36, Pro37, Pro3 8 -exendin-4(1-39)-Lys6-NH2(SEQ ID NO: 135),
    Asn(Glu)5-des Pro36, Pro37, Pro3 8 -exendin-4(1-39)-Lys6-NH2(SEQ ID NO: 136),
    des Pro36, Pro37, Pro3 8 -exendin-4(1-39)-Lys6-NH2(SEQ ID NO: 133),
    • Ser8-GLP-1 (7-36)-Lys6-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 115), Aib8-GLP-1 (7-36)-Lys6-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 116), Lys6-Gly8-GLP-1 (7-36)-Lys6-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 118), Lys6-Gly8-GLP-1 (7-36)-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 119),
  • (Gly8,Lys2 6 (palmitoyl)-GLP-1(7-36)(Human)-Lys6-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 103),
    (Gly8,Lys34 (palmitoyl)-GLP-1(7-36)(Human)-Lys6-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 90),
    • Gly8-GLP-1 (7-36)-Lys8-NH2(SEQ ID NO: 120), Gly8-GLP-1 (7-36)-Lys10-NH2(SEQ ID NO: 121), Gly8-GLP-1 (7-37)-Lys6-NH2(SEQ ID NO: 122),
  • and the free acid thereof and a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • Among the Preferred conjugates are
  • des Pro36-exendin-4(1-39)-Lys6-NH2 (SEQ ID NO:93),
    • Gly8-GLP-1 (7-36)-Lys6-NH2 (SEQ ID NO:88),
  • des Pro36,Pro37,Pro38-exendin-4(1-39)-Lys6-NH2(SEQ ID NO: 133), and
    their salts as defined herein.
  • In a most specific embodiment, the conjugates are selected from the group consisting of Gly8-GLP-1-(7-36)(Human)-NH2(SEQ ID NO: 87), Gly8-GLP-1-(7-36)(Human)-Lys6-NH2(SEQ ID NO: 88), Gly8Lys37(palmitoyl)-GLP-1-(7-36)(Human)-Lys7-NH2(SEQ ID NO: 89), Gly8Lys34(palmitoyl)-GLP-1-(7-36)(Human)-Lys6-NH2(SEQ ID NO: 90), des Ser39-exendin-4(1-39)-Lys6-NH2(SEQ ID NO: 91), exendin-4(1-39)-Lys6-NH2(SEQ ID NO: 92), des Pro36-exendin-4(1-39)-Lys6-NH2(SEQ ID NO: 93), des Ala35-exendin-4(1-39)-Lys6-NH2(SEQ ID NO: 94), des Gly34-exendin-4(1-39)-Lys6-NH2(SEQ ID NO: 95), des Ser39-(Lys40 (palmitoyl))exendin-4(1-39)-Lys7-NH2(SEQ ID NO: 96), des Gly34-(Lys40(palmitoyl))exendin-4(1-39)-Lys7-NH2(SEQ ID NO: 97), des Ala35-(Lys40(palmitoyl))exendin-4(1-39)-Lys7-NH2(SEQ ID NO: 98), des Pro36-(Lys40(palmitoyl))exendin-4(1-39)-Lys7-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 99) and Lys40 (palmitoyl))exendin-4(1-39)-Lys7-NH2(SEQ ID NO: 100).
  • The provision of the peptide conjugates of the present invention enables blood glucose lowering peptides, such as GLP-1 and exendins and their active analogues to be administered orally. The herein preferred terminal peptide fragments Z are chosen so as to induce an alpha-helical structure to the peptide X without significantly affecting the desired activity of X. Said helical structure stabilises the peptide chain, e.g. against degradation, as evidenced by the increased half life of from 2 to 3 times of the conjugated peptide compared to the unconjugated peptide, cf. table 5 below. The peptide sequence Z is the part of the peptide conjugate responsible for introducing of a certain structure into the molecule so that the minimum effective dose is lowered at least five fold. Preferably the minimum effective dose is lowered at least ten fold, more preferably 25 fold, even more preferably 40 fold, and most preferably 50 fold. Therefore, the present invention also relates to the use of a peptide sequence (Z) as defined above for the preparation of a said peptide conjugate as defined above.
  • Thus, the invention also relates to a novel peptide conjugate comprising a peptide X as defined herein and wherein X reduces the blood glucose level in a mammal where the ratio between the minimum effective oral dose of said peptide conjugate and the minimum effective oral dose of the peptide X is at least 1:5.
  • Specifically, the invention is directed to a method for stimulating insulin release in a mammal comprising administering an effective insulinotropic amount of the peptide conjugate of the present invention, a method of lowering blood glucose level in a mammal comprising administering an amount of the peptide conjugate of the present invention effective to lower blood glucose level in said mammal, a method of reducing gastric motility in a mammal in an amount of the peptide conjugate of the present invention effective to reduce gastric motility, a method of delaying gastric emptying in a mammal in an amount of the peptide conjugate of the present invention effective to delay gastric emptying, a method of inhibiting food uptake in a mammal in an amount of the peptide conjugate of the present invention effective to inhibit food uptake and a method of lowering plasma lipid level in a mammal comprising administering an amount of peptide conjugate of the present invention effective to lower plasma lipid level in said mammal. Specifically, the peptide conjugate of the present invention may be used in treatment of diabetes type 1 or type 2, obesity, eating disorders, hyperglycemia, metabolic disorders, gastric disease and insulin resistance syndrome.
  • The present invention also relates to methods for the preparation of said peptide conjugate, by means of recombinant DNA technology comprising the steps of (a) introducing a nucleic acid sequence encoding said conjugate into a host cell and (b) culturing said host cell and (c) isolating said conjugate from the culture or (a) culturing a recombinant host cell comprising a nucleic acid sequence encoding said conjugate under conditions permitting the production of said conjugate and (b) isolating said conjugate from the culture.
  • The method also relates to methods for the preparation of said peptide conjugate in which peptide X is obtained via recombinant DNA methods by isolating said peptide. X is then conjugated to Z which is attached to a solid support or has been prepared by solid phase synthetic methods. Furthermore, the invention relates to the preparation of the peptide conjugate of the present invention by peptide synthetic methods. Furthermore, the invention relates to the preparation of the peptide conjugate of the present invention by peptide synthetic methods.
  • The conjugates of the invention comprising an N-terminal sequence of from 33 to 39, preferably from 36 to 38, amino acid residues having a substantial homology to the native exendin-4 N-terminal sequence thought to be essential for receptor binding (insulinotropic activity) and a C-terminal sequence Z possess as a further advantage improved stability compared to native exendins and C-terminally truncated forms of exendin. Likewise, the GLP-1 peptide conjugate Compound 4 shows improved stability compared to the unconjugated Compound (iii).
    • Compositions
  • The invention also concerns a composition comprising the exendin variant or the peptide conjugate of the present invention in combination with a physiologically acceptable carrier. Such compositions may be in a form adapted to oral, parenteral (including subcutaneous (s.c.), intravenous (i.v.), intramuscular (i.m.), epidural, direct brain and intraperitoneal (i.p.)), rectal, intratracheal, intranasal, dermal, vaginal, buccal, ocularly, or pulmonary administration, preferably in a form adapted to subcutaneous or oral administration, and such compositions may be prepared in a manner well-known to the person skilled in the art, e.g., as generally described in “Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences”, 17. Ed. Alfonso R. Gennaro (Ed.), Mark Publishing Company, Easton, Pa., U.S.A., 1985 and more recent editions and in the monographs in the “Drugs and the Pharmaceutical Sciences” series, Marcel Dekker. The compositions may appear in conventional forms, for example, capsules, tablets, aerosols, topical application forms, liquid or semiliquid forms, such as solutions, suspensions, dispersions, emulsions, micelles or liposomes. Preferred are liquid compositions suitable for s.c. administration. In a preferred embodiment, the compositions of the present invention are administered subcutaneously. In an alternative preferred embodiment, the compositions of the present invention are administered orally, and in such cases one preferred administration form is a tablet or capsule.
  • The pharmaceutical carrier or diluent employed may be a conventional solid or liquid carrier. Examples of solid carriers are lactose, terra alba, sucrose, cyclodextrin, talc, gelatin, agar, pectin, acacia, magnesium stearate, stearic acid to lower alkyl ethers of cellulose. Examples of liquid carriers are syrup, peanut oil, olive oil, phospholipids, sterols, fatty acids, fatty acid amines, polyoxyethylene, isotonic buffer solutions and water. Similarly, the carrier or diluent may include any sustained release material known in the art, such as glyceryl monostearate or glyceryl distearate, alone or mixed with a wax. If a solid carrier is used for oral administration, the preparation may be tabletted, placed in a hard gelatin capsule in powder or pellet form or it can be in the form of a troche or lozenge. The amount of solid carrier will vary widely but will usually be from about about 25 mg to about 1 g.
  • A typical tablet which may be prepared by conventional tabletting techniques may contain:
      • Core: active compound (as free compound of the invention or salt thereof) 100 mg; colloidal silicon dioxide (Aerosil) 1.5 mg; cellulose, microcryst. (Avicel) 70 mg; modified cellulose gum (Ac-Di-Sol) 7.5 mg; magnesium stearate.
      • Coating: HPMC approx. 9 mg; *Mywacett 9-40T approx. 0.9 mg; *acylated monoglyceride used as plasticizer for film coating.
  • If a liquid carrier is used, the preparation may be in the form of a syrup, emulsion, soft gelatin capsule or sterile injectable liquid such as an aqueous or non-aqueous liquid suspension or solution.
  • For nasal administration, the preparation may contain a compound of the present invention, preferably a conjugate, dissolved or suspended in a liquid carrier, in particular, an aqueous carrier, for aerosol application. The carrier may contain additives such as solubilizing agents, e.g., propylene glycol, surfactants such as bile acid salts or polyoxyethylene higher alcohol ethers, absorption enhancers such as lecithin (phosphatidylcholine) or cyclodextrin, or preservatives such as parabines.
  • The composition may also be in a form suited for local or systemic injection or infusion and may, as such, be formulated with sterile water or an isotonic saline or glucose solution. The compositions may be sterilized by conventional sterilization techniques which are well known in the art. The resulting aqueous solutions may be packaged for use or filtered under aseptic conditions and lyophilized, the lyophilized preparation being combined with the sterile aqueous solution prior to administration. Preferably, the formulation to be used for intravenous, subcutaneous and oral dosing will be a solution of the active compound in buffer. The preparation may be produced immediately before use from active drug substance and sterile buffer solution. One preferred method of sterilization may be by sterile filtration of a solution made immediately prior to use. The composition may contain pharmaceutically acceptable auxiliary substances as required to approximate physiological conditions, such as buffering agents, tonicity adjusting agents and the like, for instance sodium acetate, sodium lactate, sodium chloride, potassium chloride, calcium chloride, etc.
  • The compounds of the invention possess valuable pharmacological properties, e.g. stability towards proteolytic enzymes. In vitro stability studies with the present peptides and peptide conjugates in the presence of selected proteolytic enzymes show increased half lives of the novel peptides compared to prior art peptides. Thus, the compounds of the invention exhibit considerably extended duration of action in vivo compared to GLP-1 and other GLP-1 agonists. Furthermore, the compounds of the invention stimulate cAMP formation. This effect may be demonstrated in a cAMP assay, e.g. as described in WO 98/08871.
  • The peptide compounds of the present invention are agonists of GLP-1 activity and/or exendin-4 activity and improves blood glucose tolerance in diabetic mammals as determined by assays known in the art for a particular peptide. Examples of such an assay are described herein. Thus, the invention also concerns the exendin variants and peptide conjugates as defined above for use in therapy, and the use of the peptide conjugates as defined above for the manufacture of a pharmaceutical composition for use in therapy, e.g., in the treatment of diabetes type 1 or type 2, obesity, eating disorders and insulin resistance syndrome.
  • In specific embodiments, the exendin variants and peptide conjugates of the invention may be used to stimulate insulin release, lower blood glucose level, reduce gastric motility, delay gastric emptying, inhibit food uptake, e.g. by suppression of appetite, or lower the plasma lipid level in a vertebrate or a mammal. The novel compounds of the invention may also be used generally in the treatment of diabetes mellitus associated with a risk for hyperglycemia, i.e. where insulin sensitivity is decreased with stress, myocardia infection, stroke and infections, or in cases of insulin resistance during pregnancy. The novel compounds may also be used in the treatment of other types of diabetes, such as cases where diabetes may be secondary to other endocrine diseases such as acromegaly, Cushing's syndrome, pheochromocytoma, glucagonoma, somatostatinoma, primary aldosteronism, or secondary to administration of certain hormones causing hyperglycemia, or secondary to certain drugs (antihypertensive drugs, thiazide diuretics, preparations containing estrogen, psychoactive drugs, sympathomimetic agents. Furthermore, the novel compounds of the invention may be used generally in the treatment of diseases and conditions associated with a risk for hypoglycemia, i.e. where endogenous glucose production is decreased, as following alcohol ingestion, or in cases where the sensitivity to insulin is increased in patients with hypopituitarism or primary adrenocortical insufficiency, or where insulin clearance is decreased as with progressive renal insufficiency.
  • Other specific therapeutic uses are described in WO 99/40788 (relating to the inotropic and diuretic effects of exendin and GLP-1) WO 98/39022 (relating to a method of sedating a mammalian subject having increased activation of the central or peripheral nervous system comprising administering exendin or GLP-1 or an agonist of exendin or GLP-1 to the subject to produce a sedative or anxiolytic effect on the subject), WO 93/18786 (relating to the treatment of diabetes using GLP-1(7-37) (SEQ ID NO: 124) or GLP-1(7-36)amide (SEQ ID NO: 114) in a regimen which additionally comprises treatment with an oral hypoglycemic agent, such as sulfonylurea, producing a strong synergistic effect), WO 98/19698 (relating to the use of GLP-1 analogs for the regulation of obesity), WO 98/08531 (relating to the use of GLP-1 or analogs in a method of reducing mortality and morbidity after myocardial infarction), WO 98/08873 (relating to the use of GLP-1 or analogs in a method of attenuating post-surgical catabolic changes and hormonal responses to stress). Besides, the compounds of the invention are suitable in a combination therapy with other antidiabetic agents, such as insulin, metformin, sulfonyl ureas and thiazolidinediones, or in combination therapy with other antiobesity agents, such as leptin, dexphenfluramine, amphetamin etc.
    • DEFINITIONS
  • A “peptide” as used herein is any compound produced by amide formation between a carboxyl group of one amino acid and an amino group of another. The amide bonds in peptides may be called peptide bonds. The word peptide usually applies to compounds whose amide bonds are formed between C-1 of one amino acid and N-2 of another (sometimes called eupeptide bonds), but it includes compounds with residues linked by other amide bonds (sometimes called isopeptide bonds). Peptides with fewer than about 10-20 residues may also be called oligopeptides; those with more, polypeptides. Polypeptides of specific sequence of more than about 50 residues are usually known as proteins. A “natural polypeptide sequence” as used herein refers to a polypeptide sequence consisting of natural L-amino acid residues and which is capable of being expressed by a recombinant host cell. The X compounds herein are all peptide sequences of 40 amino acid residues or less.
  • “GLP-1” as used herein includes GLP-1(7-37)-OH(SEQ ID NO: 124), GLP-1(7-37)-NH2(SEQ ID NO: 124), GLP-1(7-36)-OH(SEQ ID NO: 114), and GLP-1(7-36)-NH2(SEQ ID NO: 114).
  • “Agonist” refers to an endogenous substance or a drug that can interact with a receptor and initiate a physiological or a pharmacological response characteristic of that receptor (contraction, relaxation, secretion, enzyme activation, etc.).
  • “Antagonist” refers to a drug or a compound that opposes the physiological effects of another. At the receptor level, it is a chemical entity that opposes the receptor-associated responses normally induced by another bioactive agent.
  • “Partial agonist” refers to an agonist which is unable to induce maximal activation of a receptor population, regardless of the amount of drug applied. A “partial agonist” may be termed “agonist with intermediate intrinsic efficacy” in a given tissue. Moreover, a partial agonist may antagonize the effect of a full agonist that acts on the same receptor.
  • “Receptor” refers to a molecule or a polymeric structure in or on a cell that specifically recognizes and binds a compound acting as a molecular messenger (neurotransmitter, hormone, lymphokine, lectin, drug, etc.).
  • By “exendin variant” of the present invention is to be understood a variant of a parent exendin peptide having at least about 90% homology to exendin-4 and most preferably having at least about 95% homology to exendin-4(1-39) (SEQ ID NO: 102), which has exendin activity, e.g., lowers the blood glucose level in a mammal and binds to a GLP-1 receptor. “Exendin-4” as used herein refers to exendin-4(1-39) (SEQ ID NO: 102) the amino acid sequence of which is disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,424,286, SEQ ID NO:2, and exendin-4(1-40) (SEQ ID NO: 138) as disclosed by Chen & Drucker in The Journal of Biological Chemistry, Vol. 272, No. 7, pp. 4108-15 which differs only in having glycine in position 40 as C-terminal amino acid residue. The homology of the parent exendin is determined as the degree of identity between two protein sequences indicating a derivation of the first sequence from the second. The homology may suitably be determined by means of computer programs known in the art such as GAP provided in the GCG program package (Program Manual for the Wisconsin Package, Version 8, August 1994, Genetics Computer Group, 575 Science Drive, Madison, Wis., USA 53711) (Needleman, S. B. and Wunsch, C. D., (1970), J. Mol. Biol. 48:443-453). The following settings for polypeptide sequence comparison may be used: GAP creation penalty of 3.0 and GAP extension penalty of 0.1.
  • “Salts” include pharmaceutically acceptable salts, such as acid addition salts and basic salts. Examples of acid addition salts are hydrochloride salts, sodium salts, hydrobromide salts, etc. Examples of basic salts are salts where the cation is selected from alkali metals, such as sodium and potassium, alkaline earth metals, such as calcium, and ammonium ions +N(R3)3(R4), where R3 and R4 independently designates optionally substituted C1-6-alkyl, optionally substituted C2-6-alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted heteroaryl. Other examples of pharmaceutically acceptable salts are; e.g., those described in “Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences” 17. Ed. Alfonso R. Gennaro (Ed.), Mark Publishing Company, Easton, Pa., U.S.A., 1985 and more recent editions, and in Encyclopedia of Pharmaceutical Technology.
    • Preparation of Variants and Conjugates
  • The exendin variants and the peptide conjugates of the invention may be prepared by methods known per se in the art. Thus, the variants and the peptide sequences X and Z may be prepared by standard peptide-preparation techniques such as solution synthesis or Merrifield-type solid phase synthesis. It is believed that the Boc (tert.butyloxycarbonyl) as well as the Fmoc (9-fluorenylmethyloxycarbonyl) strategies are applicable.
  • In one possible synthesis strategy, the peptide conjugates of the invention may be prepared by solid phase synthesis by first constructing the peptide sequence Z using well-known standard protection, coupling and deprotection procedures, thereafter sequentially coupling the peptide sequence X on Z in a manner similar to the construction of Z, and finally cleaving off the entire peptide conjugate from the carrier. This strategy yields a peptide conjugate, wherein the peptide sequence Z is covalently bound to the peptide X at the C-terminal carbonyl function of X. If the desired peptide conjugate, however, is a peptide conjugate, wherein two stabilising sequences Z are covalently and independently bound to both the C- and the N-terminal of the peptide X, the above strategy is also applicable but, as will be understood by the person skilled in the art, before cleaving the off the C-terminal bound peptide conjugate from the solid support, it is necessary to sequentially couple the second peptide sequence Z to the N-terminal of X in a manner similar to the procedure described above. This strategy may also be used to attach Z to the carbonyl function on the side chain of Glu or Asp. A possible strategy for the preparation of peptide conjugates, wherein the peptide sequence Z is covalently bound to the N-terminal nitrogen atom or covalently bound to the nitrogen atom on the side chain of Lys, Arg or His of X is analogous with the method described above, i.e. said peptide conjugates may be prepared by solid phase synthesis by first constructing the peptide sequence X using well-known standard protection, coupling and deprotection procedures, thereafter sequentially coupling the peptide sequence Z on X in a manner similar to the construction of X, and finally cleaving off the entire peptide conjugate from the carrier. Another possible strategy is to prepare one or both of the two sequences X and Z (or parts thereof) separately by solution synthesis, solid phase synthesis, recombinant techniques, or enzymatic synthesis, followed by coupling of the two sequences by well-known segment condensation procedures, either in solution or using solid phase techniques or a combination thereof. In one embodiment, X may be prepared by recombinant DNA methods and Z may be prepared by solid phase synthesis. The conjugation of X and Z may be carried out by using chemical ligation. This technique allows for the assembling of totally unprotected peptide segments in a highly specific manner (Liu et al., 1996, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 118:307-312 and Dawson et al., 1996, 226:776). The conjugation can also be performed by protease-catalysed peptide bond formation, which offers a highly specific technique to combine totally unprotected peptide segments via a peptide bond (W. Kullmann, 1987, Enzymatic Peptide Synthesis, CRC Press, Boca Raton, Fla., pp. 41-59).
  • Side chain derivatization of Lys, Arg, His, Trp, Ser, Thr, Cys, Tyr, Asp and Glu with the peptide sequence, Z, can be carried out by traditional convergent peptide synthesis using suitable orthogonal protecting schemes as known in the art, or by using the equally well known general solid phase method with suitable orthogonal removable chain protection.
  • Furthermore, it is envisaged that a combination of the above-mentioned strategies may be especially applicable where a modified peptide sequence, e.g., from a peptide X comprising isosteric bonds such as reduced peptide bonds, is to be coupled to a peptide sequence Z. In this case, it may be advantageous to prepare the immobilised fragment of Z by successive coupling of amino acids, and then couple a complete peptide sequence X (prepared in solution or fully or partially using solid phase techniques or by means of recombinant techniques) to the fragment.
  • Examples of suitable solid support materials (SSM) are e.g., functionalised resins such as polystyrene, polyacrylamide, polydimethylacrylamide, polyethyleneglycol, cellulose, polyethylene, polyethyleneglycol grafted on polystyrene, latex, dynabeads, etc. It should be understood that it may be necessary or desirable that the C-terminal amino acid of the peptide sequence Z or the C-terminal amino acid of the peptide X is attached to the solid support material by means of a common linker such as 2,4-dimethoxy-4′-hydroxy-benzophenone, 4-(4-hydroxy-methyl-3-methoxyphenoxy)-butyric acid, 4-hydroxy-methyl-benzoic acid, 4-hydroxymethyl-phenoxyacetic acid, 3-(4-hydroxymethylphenoxy)propionic acid, and p-[(R,S)-a[1-(9H-fluoren-9-yl)methoxyformamido]-2,4-dimethoxybenzyl]-phenoxy-acetic acid.
  • The variants and the peptide conjugates of the invention may be cleaved from the solid support material by means of an acid such as trifluoracetic acid, trifluoromethanesulfonic acid, hydrogen bromide, hydrogen chloride, hydrogen fluoride, etc. optionally in combination with one or more “scavengers” suitable for the purpose, e.g., ethanedithiol, triisopropylsilane, phenol, thioanisole, etc., or the peptide conjugate of the invention may be cleaved from the solid support by means of a base such as ammonia, hydrazine, an alkoxide, such as sodium ethoxide, an hydroxide, such as sodium hydroxide, etc.
  • Thus, the present invention also relates to a method for the preparation of a pharmacologically active peptide conjugate, wherein Z is covalently bound to X, preferably via a peptide bond. A method for the preparation of a peptide conjugate of formula I (X—Z), comprises the steps of:
  • a) coupling an amino acid or dipeptide having suitable protecting groups, including an N-α-protecting group, in the activated form to an immobilised peptide sequence H-Z-SSM, thereby forming an immobilised N-α-protected peptide fragment,
    b) removing said N-α-protecting group, thereby forming an immobilised protected peptide fragment having an unprotected N-terminal,
    c) coupling an additional amino acid or dipeptide having suitable protecting groups including an N-α-protecting group in the carboxyl activated form to the N-terminal of the immobilised peptide fragment, and repeating the removal/coupling step procedure in step b) and c) until the desired peptide sequence X is obtained, and then
    d) cleaving off the peptide conjugate from the solid support material.
  • A method for the preparation of a peptide conjugate of formula II (Z—X), comprises the steps of:
  • a) coupling an amino acid or dipeptide having suitable protecting groups, including an N-α-protecting group, in the activated form to a solid support material (SSM), thereby forming an immobilised protected amino acid or a protected dipeptide,
    b) removing said N-α-protecting group, thereby forming an immobilised amino acid or peptide fragment having an unprotected N-terminal,
    c) coupling an additional amino acid or dipeptide having suitable protecting groups, including an N-α-protecting group, in the carboxyl activated form to the N-terminal of the immobilised amino acid or peptide fragment, and repeating the removal/coupling step procedure in step b) and c) until the desired peptide sequence X is obtained,
    d) coupling an additional amino acid or dipeptide having suitable protecting groups, including an N-α-protecting group, in the carboxyl activated form to the N-terminal of the immobilised peptide fragment, and repeating the removal/coupling step procedure in step b) and d) until the desired peptide sequence Z is obtained, and then
    e) cleaving off the peptide conjugate from the solid support material.
  • Furthermore, a method for the preparation of a peptide conjugate of formula III (Z—X—Z), comprises the steps of:
  • a) coupling an amino acid or dipeptide having suitable protecting groups, including an N-α-protecting group, in the carboxyl activated form to an immobilised peptide sequence H-Z-SSM, thereby forming an immobilised N-α-protected peptide fragment,
    b) removing said N-α-protecting group, thereby forming an immobilised peptide fragment having an unprotected N-terminal,
    c) coupling an additional amino acid or dipeptide having suitable protecting groups, including an N-α-protecting group, in the carboxyl activated form to the N-terminal of the immobilised peptide fragment, and repeating the removal/coupling step procedure in step b) and c) until the desired peptide sequence X is obtained, and then
    d) coupling an additional amino acid or dipeptide having suitable protecting groups, including an N-α-protecting group, in the carboxyl activated form to the N-terminal of the immobilised peptide fragment, and repeating the removal/coupling step procedure in step b) and d) until the desired peptide sequence Z is obtained, and then
    e) cleaving off the peptide conjugate from the solid support material.
  • The coupling, removal and cleavage steps are performed by methods known to the person skilled in the art taking into consideration the protection strategy and the selected solid phase material. In general, however, it is believed that the Boc (tert.butyloxycarbonyl) as well as the Fmoc (9-fluorenylmethyloxycarbonyl) protection strategies are applicable and that peptide bonds may be formed using the various activation procedures known to the person skilled in the art, e.g., by reacting a C-terminal activated derivative (acid halide, acid anhydride, activated ester e.g., HObt-ester, etc.) of the appropriate amino acid or peptide with the amino group of the relevant amino acid or peptide as known to a person skilled in peptide chemistry. Furthermore, it may be necessary or desirable to include side-chain protection groups when using amino acid residues carrying functional groups which are reactive under the prevailing conditions. The necessary protection scheme will be known to the person skilled in the art (cf., e.g., M. Bodanszky and A. Bodanszky, “The Practice of Peptide Synthesis”, 2. Ed, Springer-Verlag, 1994, J. Jones, “The Chemical Synthesis of Peptides”, Clarendon Press, 1991, and Dryland et al., 1986, J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans. 1:125-137).
  • The peptides and peptide conjugates of the invention may also be prepared by means of recombinant DNA technology using general methods and principles known to the person skilled in the art. A nucleic acid sequence encoding the peptides and peptide conjugates may be prepared synthetically by established standard methods, e.g., the phosphoamidite method described by S. L. Beaucage and M. H. Caruthers, Tetrahedron Letters 22, 1981, pp. 1859-1869, or the method described by Mathes et al., EMBO Journal 3, 1984, pp. 801-805. According to the phosphoamidite method, oligonucleotides are synthesized, e.g., in an automatic DNA synthesizer, purified, annealed, ligated and cloned in suitable vectors. The techniques used to isolate or clone a nucleic acid sequence encoding peptide X are known in the art and include isolation from genomic DNA, preparation from cDNA, or a combination thereof. The cloning of the nucleic acid sequences of the present invention from such genomic DNA can be effected, e.g., by using the well known polymerase chain reaction (PCR) or antibody screening of expression libraries to detect cloned DNA fragments with shared structural features. See, e.g., Innis et al., 1990, A Guide to Methods and Application, Academic Press, New York. Other nucleic acid amplification procedures such as ligase chain reaction (LCR), ligated activated transcription (LAT) and nucleic acid sequence-based amplification (NASBA) may be used. It can then be ligated to a nucleic acid sequence encoding Z.
  • The nucleic acid sequence encoding the peptides and peptide conjugates is then inserted into a recombinant expression vector which may be any vector which may conveniently be subjected to recombinant DNA procedures. The choice of vector will often depend on the host cell into which it is to be introduced. Thus, the vector may be an autonomously replicating vector, i.e., a vector which exists as an extrachromosomal entity, the replication of which is independent of chromosomal replication, e.g., a plasmid. Alternatively, the vector may be one which, when introduced into a host cell, is integrated into the host cell genome and replicated together with the chromosome(s) into which it has been integrated.
  • In the vector, the nucleic acid sequence encoding the peptides and peptide conjugates of the present invention should be operably connected to a suitable promoter sequence. The promoter may be any nucleic acid sequence which shows transcriptional activity in the host cell of choice and may be derived from genes encoding proteins either homologous or heterologous to the host cell. Examples of suitable promoters for directing the transcription of the nucleic acid sequence encoding said peptides and peptide conjugates in mammalian cells are the SV 40 promoter (Subramani et al., Mot. Cell Biol. 1, 1981, pp. 854-864), the MT-1 (metallothionein gene) promoter (Palmiter et al., Science 222, 1983, pp. 809-814) or the adenovirus 2 major late promoter, a Rous sarcoma virus (RSV) promoter, cytomegalovirus (CMV) promoter (Boshart et al., 1981, Cell 41:521-530) and a bovine papilloma virus promoter (BPV). A suitable promoter for use in insect cells is the polyhedrin promoter (Vasuvedan et al., FEBS Lett. 311, 1992, pp. 7-11).
  • Examples of suitable promoters for directing the transcription of the nucleic acid sequence encoding the peptides and peptide conjugates, especially in a bacterial host cell, are the promoters obtained from the E. coli lac operon, the Streptomyces coelicolor agarase gene (dagA), the Bacillus subtilis levansucrase gene (sacB), the Bacillus licheniformis alpha-amylase gene (amyL), the Bacillus stearothermophilus maltogenic amylase gene (amyM), the Bacillus amyloliquefaciens alpha amylase gene (amyQ), the Bacillus licheniformis penicillinase gene (penP), the Bacillus subtilis xylA and xylB genes, and the prokaryotic beta-lactamase gene (Villa-Kamaroff et al., 1978, Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences USA 75:3727-3731), as well as the tac promoter (DeBoer et al., 1983, Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences USA 80:21 25). Further promoters are described in “Useful proteins from recombinant bacteria” in Scientific American, 1980, 242:74-94; and in Sambrook et al., 1989, supra. Examples of suitable promoters for directing the transcription of the nucleic acid sequence encoding the peptides and peptide conjugates in a filamentous fungal host cell are promoters obtained from the genes encoding Aspergillus orysae TAKA amylase, Rhizomucor miehei aspartic proteinase, Aspergillus niger neutral alpha-amylase, Aspergillus niger acid stable alpha-amylase, Aspergillus niger or Aspergillus awamori glucoamylase (glaA), Rhizomucor miehei lipase, Aspergillus oryzae alkaline protease, Aspergillus oryzae triose phosphate isomerase, Aspergillus nidulans acetamidase, Fusarium oxysporum trypsin-like protease (as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,288,627, which is incorporated herein by reference), and hybrids thereof. Particularly preferred promoters for use in filamentous fungal host cells are the TAKA amylase, NA2-tpi (a hybrid of the promoters from the genes encoding Aspergillus niger neutral a amylase and Aspergillus oryzae triose phosphate isomerase), and glaA promoters. In a yeast host, useful promoters are obtained from the Saccharomyces cerevisiae enolase (ENO-1) gene, the Saccharomyces cerevisiae galactokinase gene (GAL1), the Saccharomyces cerevisiae alcohol dehydrogenase/glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate dehydrogenase genes (ADH2/GAP), and the Saccharomyces cerevisiae 3-phosphoglycerate kinase gene. Other useful promoters for yeast host cells are described by Romanos et al., 1992, Yeast 8:423-488.
  • The nucleic acid sequence encoding said peptides and peptide conjugates may also be operably connected to a suitable terminator, such as the human growth hormone terminator (Palmiter et al., op. cit.) Preferred terminators for filamentous fungal host cells are obtained from the genes encoding Aspergillus oryzae TAKA amylase, Aspergillus niger glucoamylase, Aspergillus nidulans anthranilate synthase, Aspergillus niger alpha-glucosidase, and Fusarium oxysporum trypsin-like protease. Preferred terminators for yeast host cells are obtained from the genes encoding Saccharomyces cerevisiae enolase, Saccharomyces cerevisiae cytochrome C (CYC1), or Saccharomyces cerevisiae glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate dehydrogenase. Other useful terminators for yeast host cells are described by Romanos et al., 1992, supra.
  • The vector may further comprise elements such as polyadenylation signals (e.g., from SV 40 or the adenovirus 5 Elb region), transcriptional enhancer sequences (e.g., the SV 40 enhancer) and translational enhancer sequences (e.g., the ones encoding adenovirus VA RNAs). Furthermore, preferred polyadenylation sequences for filamentous fungal host cells are obtained from the genes encoding Aspergillus oryzae TAKA amylase, Aspergillus niger glucoamylase, Aspergillus nidulans anthranilate synthase, and Aspergillus niger alpha-glucosidase. Useful polyadenylation sequences for yeast host cells are described by Guo and Sherman, 1995, Molecular Cellular Biology 15:5983-5990.
  • The recombinant expression vector may further comprise a DNA sequence enabling the vector to replicate in the host cell in question. Examples of such a sequence (when the host cell is a mammalian cell) is the SV 40 or polyoma origin of replication. Examples of bacterial origins of replication are the origins of replication of plasmids pBR322, pUC19, pACYC177, pACYC184, pUB110, pE194, pTA1060, and pAMβ1. Examples of origin of replications for use in a yeast host cell are the 2 micron origin of replication, the combination of CEN6 and ARS4, and the combination of CEN3 and ARS1. The origin of replication may be one having a mutation to make its function temperature-sensitive in the host cell (see, e.g., Ehrlich, 1978, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 75:1433).
  • The vector may also comprise a selectable marker, e.g., a gene the product of which complements a defect in the host cell, such as the gene coding for dihydrofolate reductase (DHFR) or one which confers resistance to a drug, e.g., neomycin, geneticin, ampicillin, or hygromycin. Suitable markers for yeast host cells are ADE2, HIS3, LEU2, LYS2, MET3, TRP1, and URA3. A selectable marker for use in a filamentous fungal host cell may be selected from the group including, but not limited to, amdS (acetamidase), argB (ornithine carbamoyltransferase), bar (phosphinothricin acetyltransferase), hygB (hygromycin phosphotransferase), niaD (nitrate reductase), pyrG (orotidine-5′-phosphate decarboxylase), sC (sulfate adenyltransferase), trpC (anthranilate synthase), and glufosinate resistance markers, as well as equivalents from other species. Preferred for use in an Aspergillus cell are the amdS and pyrG markers of Aspergillus nidulans or Aspergillus oryzae and the bar marker of Streptomyces hygroscopicus. Furthermore, selection may be accomplished by cotransformation, e.g., as described in WO 91/17243, where the selectable marker is on a separate vector.
  • The procedures used to ligate the nucleic acid sequences coding for the peptides and peptide conjugates, the promoter and the terminator, respectively, and to insert them into suitable vectors containing the information necessary for replication, are well known to persons skilled in the art (cf., for instance, Sambrook et al., op.cit.).
  • The host cell into which the expression vector is introduced may be any cell which is capable of producing the peptides and peptide conjugates and is may be a eukaryotic cell, such as invertebrate (insect) cells or vertebrate cells, e.g., Xenopus laevis oocytes or mammalian cells, in particular insect and mammalian cells. Examples of suitable mammalian cell lines are the COS (e.g., ATCC CRL 1650), KIK (e.g., ATCC CRL 1632, ATCC CCL 10) or CHO (e.g., ATCC CCL 61) cell lines. Methods for transfecting mammalian cells and expressing DNA sequences introduced in the cells are described in e.g., Kaufman and Sharp, 1982, J. Mol. Biol. 159:601-621; Southern and Berg, 1982, J. Mol. Appl. Genet. 1:327-341; Loyter et al., 1982, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 79:422-426; Wigler et al., 1978, Cell 14:725; Corsaro and Pearson, 1981, Somatic Cell Genetics 7:603, Graham and van der Eb, 1973, Virology 52:456; Fraley et al., 1980, JBC 225:10431; Capecchi, 1980, Cell 22:479; Wiberg et al., 1983, NAR 11:7287; and Neumann et al., 1982, EMBO J. 1:841-845. The host cell may also be a unicellular pathogen, e.g., a prokaryote, or a non-unicellular pathogen, e.g., a eukaryote. Useful unicellular cells are bacterial cells such as gram positive bacteria including, but not limited to, a Bacillus cell, e.g., Bacillus alkalophilus, Bacillus amyloliquefaciens, Bacillus brevis, Bacillus circulans, Bacillus coagulans, Bacillus lautus, Bacillus lentus, Bacillus licheniformis, Bacillus megaterium, Bacillus stearothermophilus, Bacillus subtilis, and Bacillus, thuringiensis; or a Streptomyces cell, e.g., Streptomyces lividans or Streptomyces murinus, or gram negative bacteria such as E. coli and Pseudomonas sp. In a preferred embodiment, the bacterial host cell is a Bacillus lentus, Bacillus licheniformis, Bacillus stearothermophilus or Bacillus subtilis cell. The transformation of a bacterial host cell may, for instance, be effected by protoplast transformation (see, e.g., Chang and Cohen, 1979, Molecular General Genetics 168:111-115), by using competent cells (see, e.g., Young and Spizizin, 1961, Journal of Bacteriology 81:823-829, or Dubnar and Davidoff Abelson, 1971, Journal of Molecular Biology 56:209-221), by electroporation (see, e.g., Shigekawa and Dower, 1988, Biotechniques 6:742-751), or by conjugation (see, e.g., Koehler and Thorne, 1987, Journal of Bacteriology 169:5771-5278). The host cell may be a fungal cell. The fungal host cell may also be a yeast cell. “Yeast” as used herein includes ascosporogenous yeast (Endomycetales), basidiosporogenous yeast, and yeast belonging to the Fungi Imperfecti (Blastomycetes).
  • The medium used to culture the cells may be any conventional medium suitable for growing mammalian cells, such as a serum-containing or serum-free medium containing appropriate supplements, or a suitable medium for growing insect, yeast or fungal cells. Suitable media are available from commercial suppliers or may be prepared according to published recipes (e.g., in catalogues of the American Type Culture Collection).
  • Thus, the invention also relates to a method for producing the exendin variants and peptide conjugates of the invention having a natural polypeptide sequence, comprising
    • a) introducing a nucleic acid sequence encoding a polypeptide sequence comprising the peptide sequence of the exendin variant or the peptide conjugate of the invention and a selectable marker contained within a nucleic acid construct or a vector into a host cell to obtain a recombinant host cell;
    • b) selecting said recombinant host cell;
    • c) culturing said recombinant host cells under conditions permitting the production of said polypeptide sequence;
    • d) isolating said polypeptide sequence from the culture; and
    • e) optionally cleaving said polypeptide sequence using an appropriate protease to obtain said peptide conjugate.
  • The variants and peptide conjugates of the invention having a natural polypeptide sequence thus produced by the cells may then be recovered from the culture medium by conventional procedures including separating the host cells from the medium by centrifugation or filtration, precipitating the proteinaceous components of the supernatant or filtrate by means of a salt, e.g., ammonium sulphate, purification by a variety of chromatographic procedures, e.g., ion exchange chromatography, affinity chromatography, or the like. The lipophilic substituent(s) may be attached to the peptide of the present invention using procedures known in the art. In one embodiment, the lipophilic substituent may be attached by incorporating an amino acid with the lipophilic substituent already attached in the standard synthesis method (see, for example, synthesis of compound 7 in the Examples section). Alternatively, the substituent may be attached after the peptide has been synthesized and isolated as, for example, described in WO98/08871.
  • The invention is further illustrated by the following examples.
    • EXAMPLES Peptide Synthesis, General Procedures
  • Apparatus and Synthetic Strategy
  • Peptides are synthesized batchwise in a polyethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration using 9-fluorenylmethyloxycarbonyl (Fmoc) as the N-α-amino protecting group and suitable common protection groups for side-chain functionalities (Dryland et al., 1986, J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans. 1:125-137).
  • Solvents
  • Solvent DMF (N,N-dimethylformamide, Riedel de-Häen, Germany) is purified by passing it through a column packed with a strong cation exchange resin (Lewatit S 100 MB/H strong acid, Bayer AG Leverkusen, Germany) and analysed for free amines prior to use by addition of 3,4-dihydro-3-hydroxy-4-oxo-1,2,3-benzotriazine (Dhbt-OH) giving rise to a yellow color (Dhbt-O-anion) if free amines are present. Solvent DCM (dichloromethane, analytical grade, Riedel de-Häen, Germany) is used directly without purification. THF (tetrahydrofuran, analytical grade, Riedel de-Häen, Germany) is used directly without further purification.
  • Amino Acids
  • Fmoc-protected amino acids are purchased from MilliGen (UK) and from PerSeptive Biosystems GmbH Hamburg, Germany in suitable side-chain protected forms. FmocLys(palmitoyl)-OH is purchased from Bachem (Switzerland).
  • Linker
  • (4-hydroxymethylphenoxy)acetic acid (HMPA), Novabiochem, Switzerland is coupled to the resin either as a preformed or in situ generated 1-hydroxybenzotriazole (HObt) ester by means of DIC.
  • Coupling Reagents
  • Coupling reagent diisopropylcarbodiimide (DIC) is purchased from (Riedel de-Häen, Germany) and distilled prior to use, dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (DCC) is purchased from Merck-Schuchardt, München, Germany, and purified by distillation.
  • Solid Supports
  • Peptides synthesized according to the Fmoc-strategy are synthesized on the following types of solid support using 0.05 M or higher concentrations of Fmoc-protected activated amino acid in DMF. TentaGel S resins 0.22-0.31 mmol/g (TentaGel S-Ram, TentaGel S RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc; Rapp polymere, Germany).
  • Catalysts and Other Reagents
  • Diisopropylethylamine (DIEA) is purchased from Aldrich, Germany, and ethylenediamine from Fluka, piperidine and pyridine from Riedel-de Häen, Frankfurt, Germany. 4-(N,N-di-methylamino)pyridine (DMAP) is purchased from Fluka, Switzerland and used as a catalyst in coupling reactions involving symmetrical anhydrides. Ethanedithiol is purchased from Riedel-de Häen, Frankfurt, Germany. 3,4-dihydro-3-hydroxy-4-oxo-1,2,3-benzotriazine (Dhbt-OH) and 1-hydroxybenzotriazole (HObt) are obtained from Fluka, Switzerland.
  • Coupling Procedures
  • The first amino acid is coupled as a symmetrical anhydride in DMF generated from the appropriate N-α-protected amino acid by means of DIC or DCC. The following amino acids are coupled as preformed HObt esters made from appropriate N-α-protected amino acids and HObt by means of DIC in DMF. Acylations are checked by the ninhydrin test performed at 80° C. in order to prevent Fmoc deprotection during the test (Larsen, B. D. and Holm, A., 1994, Int. J. Peptide Protein Res. 43:1-9).
  • Coupling as HObt-Ester
  • Method a. 3 eq. N-α-amino protected amino acid is dissolved in DMF together with 3 eq. HObt and 3 eq DIC. The solution is left at r.t. for 10 minutes and then added to the resin, which had been washed with a solution of 0.2% Dhbt-OH in DMF prior to the addition of the preactivated amino acid.
  • Method b. 3 eq. N-α-amino protected amino acid is dissolved in DMF together with 3 eq. HObt. 3 eq DIC are added just prior to use. The final solution is added to the resin.
  • Preformed Symmetrical Anhydride
  • 6 eq. N-α-amino protected amino acid is dissolved in DCM and cooled to 0° C. DCC or DIC (3 eq.) is added and the reaction continued for 10 min. The solvent is removed in vacuo and the residue dissolved in DMF. The DMF-solution is filtered in case of using DCC and immediately added to the resin followed by 0.1 eq. of DMAP.
  • Deprotection of the N-α-Amino Fmoc Protecting Group
  • Deprotection of the Fmoc group is performed by treatment with 20% piperidine in DMF (1×5 and 1×10 min.), followed by wash with DMF until no yellow colour (Dhbt-O-) could be detected after addition of Dhbt-OH to the drained DMF.
  • Cleavage of Peptide from Resin with Acid
  • Method a. Peptides are cleaved from the resins by treatment with 95% trifluoroacetic acid (TFA, Riedel-de Häen, Frankfurt, Germany)-water v/v or with 95% TFA and 5% ethanedithiol v/v at r.t. for 2 h. The filtered resins are washed with 95% TFA-water and filtrates and washings are diluted by adding 10% acetic acid. The resulting mixture is extracted 3 times with ether and finally freeze dried. The crude freeze dried product is analysed by high-performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) and identified by mass spectrometry (MS).
  • Batchwise Peptide Synthesis on TentaGel S-RAM
  • TentaGel S-RAM resin (100-1000 mg, 0.22-0.31 mmol/g) is placed in a polyethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration. The resin is swelled in DMF (5-10 ml), and the Fmoc group is removed according to the procedure described above. The following amino acids according to the sequence are coupled as Fmoc-protected HObt esters (3 eq.) generated in situ by means of DIC as described above. The couplings are continued for 3 h, unless otherwise specified. The resin is drained and washed with DMF (4×5-10 ml, 2 min each) in order to remove excess reagent. All acylations are checked by the ninhydrin test performed at 80° C. After completion of the synthesis, the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3×5-10 ml, 5 min each), DCM (3×5-10 ml, 1 min each) and finally diethyl ether (3×5-10 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo.
  • HPLC Conditions
  • Isocratic HPLC analysis is preformed on a Shimadzu system consisting of an LC-6A pump, an MERCK HITACHI L-4000 UV detector operated at 215 nm and a Rheodyne 7125 injection valve with a 20 μl loop. The column used for isocratic analysis is a Spherisorb ODS-2 (100×3 mm; 5-μm particles) (MicroLab, Aarhus, Denmark). HPLC analysis using gradients is performed on a MERCK-HITACHI L-6200 Intelligent pump, an MERCK HITACHI L-4000 UV detector operated at 215 nm and a Rheodyne 7125 injection valve with a 20 μl loop, or on a Waters 600 E instrument equipped with a Waters 996 photodiode array detector. The columns used are a Rescorce™ RPC 1 ml (Waters) or a LiChroCART 125-4, LiChrospher 100 RP-18 (5 μm) (Merck).
  • Buffer A is 0.1 vol % TFA in water and buffer B 90 vol % acetonitrile, 9.9 vol % water and 0.1 vol % TFA. The buffers are pumped through the columns at a flow rate of 13-1.5 ml/min using either of the following gradients for peptide analysis 1) Linear gradient from 0%-100% B (30 min) or 2) 0% B (2 min) linear gradient from 0-50% B (23 min) 50-100% B (5 min).
  • For Preparative HPLC, purification is performed on a Waters 600 E instrument equipped with a Waters 996 photodiode array detector. The column used is a Waters Delta-Pak C-18 15 μm, 100 Å, 25×100 mm. Gradient “2)” is used with a flow rate of 9 ml/min.
  • Mass Spectroscopy
  • Mass spectra are obtained on a Finnigan Mat LCQ instrument equipped with an electrospray (ESI) probe (ES-MS) and on a TofSpec E, Fisons Instrument (MALDI-TOF) using β-cyano-p-hydroxycinnamic acid as matrix. Alternatively, spectra may be obtained by a Micromass LCT instrument.
    • Peptide Synthesis of Prior Art Peptides (i) Peptide Synthesis of Compound (i),
  • H-His-Gly-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Leu-Ser-Lys-Gln-Met-Glu-Glu-Glu-Ala-Val-Arg-Leu-Phe-Ile-Glu-Trp-Leu-Lys-Asn-Gly-Gly-Pro-Ser-Ser-Gly-Ala-Pro-Pro-Pro-Ser-NH2
  • (exendin-4(1-39)-NH2) (SEQ ID NO:102) on TentaGel S-RAM.
  • Dry TentaGel S-RAM resin (0.25 mmol/g, 1000 mg) is placed in a polyethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml). The Fmoc group is removed according to the procedure described above, and the peptide according to the sequence is assembled as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-RAM resins”. After completion of the synthesis, the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3×5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3×5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3×5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo. The peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid. The crude peptide is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above. The purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 90%. The identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 17%.
  • (ii) Peptide Synthesis of Compound (ii),
  • H-His-Gly-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Leu-Ser-Lys-Gln-Met-Glu-Glu-Glu-Ala-Val-Arg-Leu-Phe-Ile-Glu-Trp-Leu-Lys-Asn-Gly-Gly-Pro-Ser-Ser-Gly-Ala-Pro-Pro-Pro-NH2(SEQ ID NO: 129)
  • (des Ser39 exendin-4(1-39)-NH2) (SEQ ID NO: 129) on TentaGel S-RAM.
  • Dry TentaGel S-RAM resin (0.25 mmol/g, 1000 mg) is placed in a polyethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml). The Fmoc group is removed according to the procedure described above, and the peptide according to the sequence is assembled as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-RAM resins”. After completion of the synthesis, the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3×5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3×5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3×5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo. The peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze-dried from acetic acid. The crude peptide is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above. The purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 97%. The identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 22%.
  • (iii) Peptide Synthesis of Compound (iii),
  • H-His-Gly-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Val-Ser:-Ser-Tyr-Leu-Glu-Gly-Gln-Ala-Ala-Lys-Glu-Phe-Ile-Ala-Trp-Leu-Val-Lys-Gly-Arg-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 87)
  • (Gly8-GLP1-(7-36)(Human)-NH2) (SEQ ID NO:87) on TentaGel S-RAM.
  • Dry TentaGel S-RAM resin (0.25 mmol/g, 1000 mg) is placed in a polyethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml). The Fmoc group is removed according to the procedure described above, and the peptide according to the sequence is assembled as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-RAM resins”. After completion of the synthesis, the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3×5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3×5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3×5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo. The peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid. The crude peptide is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above. The purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 95%. The identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 9%.
    • Synthesis of Peptide Sequences of the Invention 1. Peptide Synthesis of Compound 1,
  • H-His-Gly-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Leu-Ser-Lys-Gln-Met-Glu-Glu-Glu-Ala-Val-Arg-Leu-Phe-Ile-Glu-Trp-Leu-Lys-Asn-Gly-Gly-Fro-Ser-Ser-Gly-Ala-Pro-Pro-Ser-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 101)
  • (des Pro36-exendin-4(1-39)-NH2) (SEQ ID NO:101) on TentaGel S-RAM.
  • Dry TentaGel S-RAM resin (0.25 mmol/g, 1500 mg) is placed in a polyethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml). The Fmoc group is removed according to the procedure described above, and the peptide according to the sequence is assembled as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-RAM resins”. After completion of the synthesis, the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3×5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3×5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3×5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo. The peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid. The crude peptide is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above. The purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 95%. The identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 18.3%.
    • 2. Peptide Synthesis of Compound 2,
  • H-His-Gly-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Leu-Ser-Lys-Gln-Met-Glu-Glu-Glu-Ala-Val-Arg-Leu-Phe-Ile-Glu-Trp-Leu-Lys-Asn-Gly-Gly-Pro-Ser-Ser-Gly-Ala-Pro-Pro-Ser-(Lys)6-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 93)
  • (des-Pro36-exendin-4(1-39)-Lys6-NH2) (SEQ ID NO:93) on TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc.
  • Dry TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc resin (0.22 mmol/g, 1500 mg) is placed in a poly-ethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml). The Fmoc group on the first lysine is removed as described above and the synthesis is continued until finishing the peptide sequence as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-Ram-Lys(Boc)Fmoc”. After completion of the synthesis, the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3×5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3×5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3×5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo. The peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid. The crude freeze dried product is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above. The purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 95%. The identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 22.1%.
    • 3. Peptide Synthesis of Compound 3,
  • H-His-Gly-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Leu-Ser-Lys-Gln-Met-Glu-Glu-Glu-Ala-Val-Arg-Leu-Phe-Ile-Glu-Trp-Leu-Lys-Asn-Gly-Gly-Pro-Ser-Ser-Gly-Ala-Pro-Pro-Pro-Ser-(Lys)6-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 92)
  • (exendin-4(1-39)-Lys6-NH2) (SEQ ID NO:92) on TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc.
  • Dry TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc resin (0.22 mmol/g, 1000 mg) is placed in a poly-ethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml). The Fmoc group on the first lysine is removed as described above and the synthesis is continued until finishing the peptide sequence as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-Ram-Lys(Boc)Fmoc”. After completion of the synthesis, the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3×5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3×5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3×5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo. The peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid. The crude freeze dried product is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above. The purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 90%. The identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 20.5%.
  • 4. Peptide synthesis of Compound 4,
  • H-His-Gly-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Val-Ser-Ser-Tyr-Leu-Glu-Gly-Gln-Ala-Ala-Lys-Glu-Phe-Ile-Ala-Trp-Leu-Val-Lys-Gly-Arg-(Lys)6-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 88) (Gly8-GLP1-(7-36)(Human)-Lys6-NH2) (SEQ ID NO:88) on TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc.
  • Dry TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc resin (0.22 mmol/g, 1000 mg) is placed in a polyethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml). The Fmoc group on the first lysine is removed as described above and the synthesis is continued until finishing the peptide sequence as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-Ram-Lys(Boc)Fmoc”. After completion of the synthesis, the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3×5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3×5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3×5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo. The peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid. The crude freeze dried product is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above. The purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 95%. The identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 11.7%.
  • 4a. Peptide Synthesis of Compound 4,
  • H-His-Gly-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Val-Ser-Ser-Tyr-Leu-Glu-Gly-Gln-Ala-Ala-Lys-Glu-Phe-Ile-Ala-Trp-Leu-Val-Lys-Gly-Arg-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 88)
  • ([Gly8]hGLP-1(7-36)-(Lys)6-NH2) (SEQ ID NO:88) on TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc.
  • Dry TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc resin (022 mmol/g, 2013 mg) is placed in a glass vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml). The Fmoc group on the first lysine is removed as described above and the synthesis is continued until finishing the peptide sequence as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-Ram-Lys(Boc)Fmoc”. After completion of the synthesis, the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3×5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3×5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3×5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo. The peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid. The crude freeze dried product is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above. The purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 90%. The identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 13%.
    • 5. Peptide Synthesis of Compound 5,
  • H-His-Gly-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Val-Ser-Ser-Tyr-Leu-Glu-Gly-Gln-Ala-Ala-Lys-Glu-Phe-Ile-Ala-Trp-Leu-Val-Lys-Gly-Arg-Lys(palmitoyl)-(Lys)6-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 89)
  • ([Gly8,Lys37(palmitoyl)]GLP1-(7-36)(Human)-(Lys)7-NH2) (SEQ ID NO:89) on TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc.
  • Dry TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc resin (0.22 mmol/g, 1000 mg) is placed in a polyethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml). The Fmoc group on the first lysine is removed as described above and the synthesis is continued until finishing the peptide sequence as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-Ram-Lys(Boc)Fmoc”. The reagent Fmoc-Lys(palmitoyl)-OH is coupled in a slightly modified manner due to its poor solubility in DMF. Approximately 400 mg of Fmoc-Lys(palmitoyl)-OH is dissolved in approximately 6 ml THF rather than DMF. After completion of the synthesis, the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3×5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3×5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3×5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo. The peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method b as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid. The crude freeze dried product is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above. The purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 95%. The identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 93%.
    • 6. Peptide Synthesis of Compound 6,
  • H-His-Gly-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Val-Ser-Ser-Tyr-Leu-Glu-Gly-Gln-Ala-Ala-Lys-Glu-Phe-Ile-Ala-Trp-Leu-Val-Lys(palmitoyl)-Gly-Arg-(Lys)6-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 90)
  • ([Gly8,Lys34(palmitoyl)]GLP1-(7-36)(Human)-(Lys)6-NH2) (SEQ ID NO:90) on TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc.
  • Dry TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc resin (022 mmol/g, 1000 mg) is placed in a polyethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml). The Fmoc group on the first lysine is removed as described above and the synthesis is continued until finishing the peptide sequence as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-Ram-Lys(Boc)Fmoc”. The reagent Fmoc-Lys(palmitoyl)-OH is coupled in a slightly modified manner due to its poor solubility in DMF. Approximately 400 mg of Fmoc-Lys(palmitoyl)-OH is dissolved in approximately 6 ml THF rather than DMF. After completion of the synthesis, the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3×5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3×5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3×5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo. The peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid. The crude freeze dried product is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above. The purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 90%. The identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 42%.
    • 7. Peptide Synthesis of Compound 7,
  • H-His-Gly-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Val-Ser-Ser-Tyr-Leu-Glu-Gly-Gln-Ala-Ala-Lys(palmitoyl)-Glu-Phe-Ile-Ala-Trp-Leu-Val-Lys-Gly-Arg-(Lys)6-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 103)
  • ([Gly8, Lys2 6 (palmitoyl)]GLP1-(7-36)(Human)-(Lys)6-NH2) (SEQ ID NO:103) on TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc.
  • Dry TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc resin (022 mmol/g, 1000 mg) is placed in a polyethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml). The Fmoc group on the first lysine is removed as described above and the synthesis is continued until finishing the peptide sequence as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-Ram-Lys(Boc)Fmoc”. The reagent Fmoc-Lys(palmitoyl)-OH is coupled in a slightly modified manner due to its poor solubility in DMF. Approximately 400 mg of Fmoc-Lys(palmitoyl)-OH is dissolved in approximately 6 ml THF rather than DMF. After completion of the synthesis, the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3×5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3×5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3×5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo. The peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid. The crude freeze dried product is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above. The purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 90%. The identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 22%.
    • 8. Peptide Synthesis of Compound 8,
  • H-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-His-Gly-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Leu-Ser-Lys-Gln-Met-Glu-Glu-Glu-Ala-Val-Arg-Leu-Phe-Ile-Glu-Trp-Leu-Lys-Asn-Gly-Gly-Pro-Ser-Ser-Gly-Ala-Pro-Pro-Ser-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 149)
  • (H-(Lys)6-des Pro36exendin-4(1-39)-NH2) (SEQ ID NO: 149) on TentaGel S-RAM-Fmoc.
  • Dry TentaGel S-RAM-Fmoc resin (0.23 mmol/g, 1000 mg) is placed in a poly-ethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml). The Fmoc group on the resin is removed as described above and the synthesis is continued until finishing the peptide sequence as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-Ram-Fmoc”. After completion of the synthesis, the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3×5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3×5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3×5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo. The peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid. The crude freeze dried product is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above. The purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 95%. The identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 26%.
    • 9. Peptide Synthesis of Compound 9,
  • H-Lys6-His-Gly-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Leu-Ser-Lys-Gln-Met-Glu-Glu-Glu-Ala-Val-Arg-Leu-Phe-Ile-Glu-Trp-Leu-Lys-Asn-Gly-Gly-Pro-Ser-Ser-Gly-Ala-Pro-Pro-Ser-(Lys)6-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 150)
  • (H-Lys6-des Pro36exendin-4(1-39)-Lys6-NH2) (SEQ ID NO: 150) on TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc.
  • Dry TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc resin (0.22 mmol/g, 1000 mg) is placed in a poly-ethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml). The Fmoc group on the first lysine is removed as described above and the synthesis is continued until finishing the peptide sequence as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-Ram-Lys(Boc)Fmoc”. After completion of the synthesis, the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3×5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3×5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3×5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo. The peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid. The crude freeze dried product is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above. The purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 90%. The identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 32%.
    • 10. Peptide Synthesis of Compound 10,
  • H-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-His-Gly-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Val-Ser-Ser-Tyr-Leu-Glu-Gly-Gln-Ala-Ala-Lys-Glu-Phe-Ile-Ala-Trp-Leu-Val-Lys-Gly-Arg-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 118) (H-(Lys)6-([Gly5]hGLP-1(7-36)-(Lys)6-NH2) (SEQ ID NO: 118) on TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc.
  • Dry TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc resin (022 mmol/g, 1000 mg) is placed in a poly-ethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml). The Fmoc group on the first lysine is removed as described above and the synthesis is continued until finishing the peptide sequence as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-Ram-Lys(Boc)Fmoc”. After completion of the synthesis, the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3×5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3×5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3×5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo. The peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid. The crude freeze dried product is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above. The purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 90%. The identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 18%.
    • 11. Peptide Synthesis of Compound 11,
  • H-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-His-Gly-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Val-Ser-Ser-Tyr-Leu-Glu-Gly-Gln-Ala-Ala-Lys-Glu-Phe-Ile-Ala-Trp-Leu-Val-Lys-Gly-Arg-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 119)
  • (H-(Lys)6-[Gly8]hGLP-1(7-36)-NH2) (SEQ ID NO: 119) on TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc.
  • Dry TentaGel S-RAM-Fmoc resin (0.23 mmol/g, 1000 mg) is placed in a poly-ethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml). The Fmoc group on the resin is removed as described above and the synthesis is continued until finishing the peptide sequence as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-Ram-Fmoc”. After completion of the synthesis, the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3×5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3×5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3×5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo. The peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid. The crude freeze dried product is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above. The purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 98%. The identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 15%.
    • 12. Peptide Synthesis of Compound 12,
  • H-His-Gly-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Val-Ser-Ser-Tyr-Leu-Glu-Gly-Gln-Ala-Ala-Lys-Glu-Phe-Ile-Ala-Trp-Leu-Val-Lys-Gly-Arg-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 120)
  • ([Gly8]hGLP-1(7-36)-(Lys)8-NH2) (SEQ ID NO: 120) on TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc.
  • Dry TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc resin (0.22 mmol/g, 1000 mg) is placed in a poly-ethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml). The Fmoc group on the first lysine is removed as described above and the synthesis is continued until finishing the peptide sequence as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-Ram-Lys(Boc)Fmoc”. After completion of the synthesis, the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3×5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3×5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3×5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo. The peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid. The crude freeze dried product is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above. The purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 98%. The identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 4.2%.
    • 13. Peptide Synthesis of Compound 13,
  • H-His-Gly-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Val-Ser-Ser-Tyr-Leu-Glu-Gly-Gln-Ala-Ala-Lys-Glu-Phe-Ile-Ala-Trp-Leu-Val-Lys-Gly-Arg-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 121)
  • ([Gly8]hGLP-1(7-36)-(Lys)10-NH2) (SEQ ID NO: 121) on TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc.
  • Dry TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc resin (0.22 mmol/g, 1000 mg) is placed in a poly-ethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml). The Fmoc group on the first lysine is removed as described above and the synthesis is continued until finishing the peptide sequence as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-Ram-Lys(Boc)Fmoc”. After completion of the synthesis, the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3×5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3×5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3×5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo. The peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid. The crude freeze dried product is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above. The purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 95%. The identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 2%.
    • 14. Peptide Synthesis of Compound 14,
  • H-His-Gly-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Leu-Ser-Lys-Gln-Met-Glu-Glu-Glu-Ala-Val-Arg-Leu-Phe-Ile-Glu-Trp-Leu-Lys-Asn-Gly-Gly-Pro-Ser-Ser-Gly-Ala-Ser-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 132)
  • (H-des Pro36, Pro37, Pro38exendin-4(1-39)-NH2) (SEQ ID NO: 132) on TentaGel S-RAM-Fmoc.
  • Dry TentaGel S-RAM-Fmoc resin (0.23 mmol/g, 1000 mg) is placed in a poly-ethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml). The Fmoc group on the resin is removed as described above and the synthesis is continued until finishing the peptide sequence as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-Ram-Fmoc”. After completion of the synthesis, the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3×5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3×5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3×5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo. The peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid. The crude freeze dried product is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above. The purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 95%. The identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 11%.
    • 15. Peptide Synthesis of Compound 15,
  • H-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-Lys-His-Gly-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Leu-Ser-Lys-Gln-Met-Glu-Glu-Glu-Ala-Val-Arg-Leu-Phe-Ile-Glu-Trp-Leu-Lys-Asn-Gly-Gly-Pro-Ser-Ser-Gly-Ala-Ser-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 134)
  • (H-(Lys)6-des Pro36, Pro37, Pro38exendin-4(1-39)-NH2) (SEQ ID NO: 134) on TentaGel S-RAM-Fmoc.
  • Dry TentaGel S-RAM-Fmoc resin (0.23 mmol/g, 1000 mg) is placed in a poly-ethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml). The Fmoc group on the resin is removed as described above and the synthesis is continued until finishing the peptide sequence as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-Ram-Fmoc”. After completion of the synthesis, the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3×5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3×5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3×5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo. The peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid. The crude freeze dried product is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above. The purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 94%. The identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 17%.
    • 16. Peptide Synthesis of Compound 16,
  • H-Asn-Glu-Glu-Glu-Glu-Glu-His-Gly-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Leu-Ser-Lys-Gln-Met-Glu-Glu-Glu-Ala-Val-Arg-Leu-Phe-Ile-Glu-Trp-Leu-Lys-Asn-Gly-Gly-Pro-Ser-Ser-Gly-Ala-Ser-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 137)
  • (H-Asn-(Glu)5-des Pro36, Pro37, Pro38exendin-4(1-39)-NW) (SEQ ID NO: 137) on TentaGel S-RAM-Fmoc.
  • Dry TentaGel S-RAM-Fmoc resin (0.23 mmol/g, 1000 mg) is placed in a poly-ethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml). The Fmoc group on the resin is removed as described above and the synthesis is continued until finishing the peptide sequence as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-Ram-Fmoc”. After completion of the synthesis, the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3×5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3×5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3×5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo. The peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid. The crude freeze dried product is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above. The purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 90%. The identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 9%.
    • 17. Peptide Synthesis of Compound 17,
  • Compound 3, H-(Lys)6-His-Gly-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Leu-Ser-Lys-Gln-Met-Glu-Glu-Glu-Ala-Val-Arg-Leu-Phe-Ile-Glu-Trp-Leu-Lys-Asn-Gly-Gly-Pro-Ser-Ser-Gly-Ala-Ser-(Lys)6-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 135)
  • (H-(Lys)6-des Pro36, Pro37, Pro38exendin-4(1-39)-(Lys)6-NH2) (SEQ ID NO: 135) on TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc.
  • Dry TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc resin (0.22 mmol/g, 1000 mg) is placed in a poly-ethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml). The Fmoc group on the first lysine is removed as described above and the synthesis is continued until finishing the peptide sequence as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-Ram-Lys(Boc)Fmoc”. After completion of the synthesis, the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3×5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3×5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3×5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo. The peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid. The crude freeze dried product is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above. The purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 90%. The identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 10%.
    • 18. Peptide Synthesis of Compound 18,
  • H-Asn-Glu-Glu-Glu-Glu-Glu-His-Gly-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Leu-Ser-Lys-Gln-Met-Glu-Glu-Glu-Ala-Val-Arg-Leu-Phe-Ile-Glu-Trp-Leu-Lys-Asn-Gly-Gly-Pro-Ser-Ser-Gly-Ala-Ser-(Lys)6-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 136)
  • (H-Asn-(Glu); des Pro36, Pro37, Pro38exendin-4(1-39)-(Lys)6-NH2) (SEQ ID NO: 136) on TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc.
  • Dry TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc resin (0.22 mmol/g, 1000 mg) is placed in a poly-ethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml). The Fmoc group on the first lysine is removed as described above and the synthesis is continued until finishing the peptide sequence as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-Ram-Lys(Boc)Fmoc”. After completion of the synthesis, the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3×5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3×5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3×5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo. The peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid. The crude freeze dried product is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above. The purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 92%. The identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 14%.
    • 19. Peptide Synthesis of Compound 19,
  • H-His-Gly-Glu-GIy-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Leu-Ser-Lys-Gln-Met-Glu-Glu-Glu-Ala-Val-Arg-Leu-Phe-Ile-Glu-Trp-Leu-Lys-Asn-Gly-Gly-Pro-Ser-Ser-Gly-Ala-Ser-(Lys)6-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 133)
  • (des Pro36, Pro37, Pro38exendin-4(1-39)-(Lys)6-NH2) (SEQ ID NO: 133) on TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc.
  • Dry TentaGel S-RAM-Lys(Boc)Fmoc resin (0.22 mmol/g, 1000 mg) is placed in a poly-ethylene vessel equipped with a polypropylene filter for filtration and swelled for two hours in DMF (5 ml). The Fmoc group on the first lysine is removed as described above and the synthesis is continued until finishing the peptide sequence as described under “Batchwise peptide synthesis on TentaGel S-Ram-Lys(Boc)Fmoc”. After completion of the synthesis, the peptide-resin is washed with DMF (3×5 ml, 1 min each), DCM (3×5 ml, 1 min each), diethyl ether (3×5 ml, 1 min each) and dried in vacuo. The peptide is cleaved from the resin according to method a as described above and freeze dried from acetic acid. The crude freeze dried product is purified by preparative HPLC using the procedure described above. The purified product is found to be homogeneous and the purity is found to be better than 97%. The identity of the peptide is confirmed by ES-MS. Yield 19%.
    • 20. Recombinant Preparation of Compound 2
  • Construction of the pYES0010 Expression Vector
  • A synthetic cDNA was constructed for heterolog expression in yeast. The protein sequence encoding Compound 2 was back translated using a Saccharomyces cerevisiae codon usage table (Saccharomyces Genome Database). To enable translation of the synthetic cDNA an additional ATG start codon was added to the 5′ end and a TAA stop codon was added to the 3′ end. The construct was inserted into HindIII and The EcoRI site of the pYES2 shuttle vector comprising an ampicilline resistance gene, and the new construct was designated pYES0010, cf. FIG. 6. pYES0010 was subsequently transformed into E. coli and subjected to ampicillin selection pressure. Positive clones were selected and sequenced.
  • Transformation into Yeast.
  • In order to make transform the pYES0010 into the yeast haploid INVSc1: MATa his3delta1 leu2 trp1-289 ura3-52. Yeast were grown in YPD medium (1% yeast extract, 2% peptone, 2% glucose, and 0.004% adenine sulfate) at 30 C to saturation. 1 ml of culture was harvested for transformations. 2 μl of 10 mend carrier DNA was added and 1 μg of pYES0010 was added and mixed. 0.5 ml (45% PEG 4000, 1 M Li OAc, 0.5M EDTA and 1M Tris-HCl (pH 7.5) was added and mixed. Finally 20 μl M DTT was added and the mixture was incubated for 16 h at room temperature. After incubation the cells were heat shocked at 42 C for 10 min and plated selective plates (6.7% yeast nitrogen base, 2% glucose, 20 μg/ml adenine, 20 μg/ml arginine, 29 μg/ml isoleucine, 20 μg/ml histidine, 60 μg/ml leucine, 20 μg/ml lysine, 20 μg/ml tryptophan, 20 μg/ml methionine 50 μg/ml phenylalanine 150 μg/ml valine, 30 μg/ml Tyrosine and 2.5% agar. Plates were incubated at 30 C for 3 to 5 days until transformants appear.
    • Expression and Purification of Compound 2.
  • Transformants were cultivated in selective media (6.7% Yeast nitrogen base, 2% glucose, 20 μg/ml adenine, 20 μg/ml arginine, 29 μg/ml isoleucine, 20 μg/ml histidine, 60 μg/ml leucine, 20 μg/ml lysine, 20 μg/ml Tryptophan, 20 μg/ml methionine 50 μg/ml phenylalanine 150 μg/ml valine, 30 μg/ml Tyrosine) for 1.5 days. The cells were harvested and resuspended in galactose induction medium (6.7% Yeast nitrogen base, 4% galactose, 20 μg/ml adenine, 20 μg/ml arginine, 29 μg/ml isoleucine, 20 μg/ml histidine, 60 μg/ml leucine, 20 μg/ml lysine, 20 μg/ml Tryptophan, 20 μg/ml methionine 50 μg/ml phenylalanine 150 μg/ml valine, 30 μg/ml Tyrosine for 1 day. The cells were harvested and homogenized in 10 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.5 containing protease inhibitors (Roche). The lysate was clarified centrifugation at 20.000×g for 30 min. The supernatant was loaded onto a Superdex 12 HR 10/30 column (Amersham Pharmacia Biotech) equilibrated with 10 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.5. The column was eluted in 50 Mm ammonia bicarbonate buffer pH 8.0. Samples containing recombinant Compound 2 were pooled. The N-terminal methionine was removed by methionine aminopeptidase and the samples were further purified on a HPLC Column.
    • HPLC Settings for Compound 2 Purification.
  • HPLC column Kromasil RP CS; K 100-10-C8 nr. CER 2230, compound
  • Temp: 22 C
  • Flow rate: 35 ml/min
  • HPLC solvents:
  • A: 0.10% trifluoroacetic acid in water
  • B: 0.10% trifluoroacetic acid in acetonitrile: water 90:10.
  • Compound 2 was eluted from the HPLC column with 0.10% trifluoroacetic acid in 20% to 80% Acetonitrile in 40 min.
    • 21. Injection Formulations of Peptide
  • Fixed dose formulations of peptide for intra venous injection are prepared by dissolving the peptide in sterile, isotonic saline, and storing the resulting solution in glass ampoules filled with inert gas under sterile conditions. Each dose of the peptide is stored dry in ampoules or capped vials filled with inert gas. Multi-dose formulations of peptide for intra venous injection are prepared by dissolving the peptide in sterile, isotonic saline, storing the resulting solution in capped vials, if necessary adding preservative (for instance 0.1% parahydroxybenzoate, 1% benzyl alcohol or 0.1% chlorocresole).
    • Example of Multi-Dose Peptide Formulation:
  • Compound 2 12.25 mg
    Sodiumdihydrogenphosphate 1.380 g
    Parahydroxybenzoate  0.1 g
    Aqua ad injectabile   100 ml
    • 22. Stability Experiments
  • In vitro stability studies with the present peptides and peptide conjugates in the presence of selected proteolytic enzymes are applied as a tool for evaluating the protection of said peptides against proteolysis in vivo. The aim of the experiments performed was to measure and compare the in vitro stability of Compounds 4, 5, 6 and 7 to that of the prior art compounds Compound (iii) H-(Gly8)-hGLP-1(7-36)-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 87) and hGLP-1(7-36)-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 114) in solutions of one or more of the enzymes leucine aminopeptidase, carboxypeptidase A and dipeptidyl aminopeptidase IV at 37° C.
    • Materials and Apparatus for In Vitro Stability
  • Water used was of highest quality obtained from a Milli-Q water treatment system (Millipore, Bedford, Mass., USA). Acetonitrile (ACN) was of super gradient quality obtained from Labscan Ltd. (Dublin, Ireland). Trifluoracetic acid (TFA) 99.9%, dihydrogen phosphate (NaH2PO4), sodium hydroxide (NaOH) and all other chemicals used were of analytical grade. Leucine aminopeptidase (EC 3.4.11.1), Carboxypeptidase A (EC 3.4.17.1) and Dipeptidyl peptidase (Dipeptidyl aminopeptidase IV, EC 3.4.14.5) were all obtained from Sigma (St. Louis, Mo., USA). Gradient HPLC analysis was done using a Hewlett Packard HP 1100 HPLC system consisting of a HP 1100 Binary Pump, a HP 1100 Autosampler, A HP 1100 Column Thermostat and a HP 1100 Variable Wavelength Detector. Hewlett Packard Chemstation for LC software (Rev. A.06.01) was used for instrument control and data acquisition. A Vydac 238TP54 (150×4.6 mm I.D.) column packed with 5 m, C18, 300 particles was used with the instrument. A SHT200D block heater from Stuart Scientific was used for heating of the peptide/enzyme solutions during the stability experiments. The degradation of the test compounds was studied at 37° C. in 50 mM phosphate buffer solutions of pH 7.4 containing leucine aminopeptidase (25 U/ml) or carboxypeptidase A (1 U/ml) or 100 mM ammoniumbicarbonate buffer of pH 8.0 containing dipeptidyl aminopeptidase IV (0.5 U/ml). Experiments were initiated by addition of an aliquot (100 l) of a stock solution (1 mg/ml) of the peptide in water to 900 l preheated enzyme solution in an Eppendorf microvial giving an initial concentration of 0.1 mg/ml (˜1.7·10-5-1.8·10-5 M) of the peptide. The peptide/enzyme solution was kept at 37° C. and at appropriate time intervals samples of 100 l were withdrawn from the peptide/enzyme solution and mixed thoroughly with 20 l 25% TFA in acetonitrile in order to stop the enzymatic degradation process. The inactivated samples were transferred to autosampler vials and analysed for content of intact test compound by HPLC as described below. Half-lives (VA) for the test compounds in enzyme solutions were calculated from plots of natural logarithm to the residual concentration (i.e. HPLC peak heights) against time using the formula:

  • t 1/2=1/k obs ln(2), where kobs is the apparent first-order rate constant for the observed degradation.
    • HPLC Analysis
  • Samples from the stability experiments performed as described above were analysed by gradient HPLC analysis using the instrumentation described above and the following experimental conditions.
  • Column temperature: 30° C.
  • Injection volume: 10 l
  • Mobile phase A: 0.1% TFA in water
  • Mobile phase B: 0.085% TFA in acetonitrile (ACN)
  • Gradient: 32-52% B in 21 min
  • Detection: UV at 215 nm
  • The experimental results obtained from the individual stability experiments are shown in Table 1 below. It appears from the table that the half life of the compounds of the invention is considerably extended in solution with all enzymes tested.
  • TABLE 1
    Test Compound
    Compound Enzyme Solution Half-life
    No. Name Enzyme Conc. (t1/2)
    Compound 5 H-(Gly8)-hGLP- LAP 25 U/ml >3 days
    1(7-36)-Lys(Palm)- CPA 1 U/ml >2 days
    Lys6-NH2 DPP IV 0.5 U/ml 440 min
    (SEQ ID NO: 153)
    Compound 7 H-(Gly8, Lys2 6 (Palm))- LAP 25 U/ml 1150 min
    hGLP-1(7-36)- CPA 1 U/ml 1058 min
    Lys6-NH2 DPP IV 0.5 U/ml 526 min
    (SEQ ID NO: 103)
    Compound 6 H-(Gly8, Lys34(Palm))- LAP 25 U/ml ~1.5 day
    hGLP-1(7-36)- CPA 1 U/ml >1 day
    Lys6-NH2 DPP IV 0.5 U/ml 177 min
    (SEQ ID NO: 90)
    GLP-1 H-hGLP-1(7-36)-NH2 LAP 25 U/ml 152 min
    (SEQ ID NO: 114) CPA 1 U/ml 48 min
    DPP IV 0.5 U/ml 2.0 min
    Compound 4 H-(Gly8)-hGLP- LAP 25 U/ml ~1.5 day
    1(7-36)-Lys6-NH2 CPA 1 U/ml 145 min
    (SEQ ID NO: 88) DPP IV 0.5 U/ml 292 min
    Compound(iii) H-(Gly8)-hGLP- LAP 25 U/ml 693 min
    1(7-36)-NH2 CPA 1 U/ml 127 min
    (SEQ ID NO: 87) DPP IV 0.5 U/ml 56 min
    LAP: Leucine aminopeptidase,
    CPA: Carboxypeptidase A,
    DPP IV: Dipeptidyl aminopeptidase IV

    23. In Vitro Stability Studies of Compound (iii) and Compound 4 in Rat Plasma
  • The degradation of the two test compounds and in heparin stabilised rat (Sprague-Dawley) plasma was followed by the combination of solid phase extraction and LC-MS. The degradation was followed for 720 minutes in plasma. The half-life of Compound (iii) was found to be 238 min. in rat plasma. This finding was compared with the half-life of Compound 4, which was found to be 466 min. in rat plasma.
    • Materials and Methods
  • Blank rat plasma in sodium heparin (5000 units/mL) were obtained from Harlan Sera Lab Ltd. (Loughborough, UK). Test Substances and Solutions The test substances used in the study are listed in the table below. For the in vitro experiments a stock solution of 100 μg/ml milli-Q water was used (corresponding to 26.0 μM Compound (iii) H-(Gly8)-GLP-1(7-36) (SEQ ID NO: 87)-NH2 or 17.8 μM Compound 4).
  • Substance Name Batch No. Average Mw. Peptide Content
    Compound (iii) ZP 7.73-1F 3284 g/mol 85%
    Compound
    4 ZP 7.69-1C 4053 g/mol 72%
  • The LC-MS analysis was performed on an HP 1100 instrument consisting of an on-line degasser, a quaternary gradient pump, an auto sampler, a column oven, Hewlett Packard (Wilmington, Del., USA) in combination with a Quattro Ultima mass spectrometer from Micromass (Altrincham, UK). Both the LC and MS were controlled by MassLynx 33 software. The LC separations prior to MS detection were performed on a Vydac 218MS52 (2.1×250 mm) column (Hesperia, Calif., USA).
  • The initial plasma volume was 1000 μl (37° C.). From the initial plasma volume, 100 μl was transferred to a 0.75 ml HPLC vial (used as blank), mixed with 560 μl extraction solution (MeCN:0.18 M ammonium carbonate pH 9.5 (6:94 v/v), 4 C) and extracted by Solid Phase Extraction using ASPEC XL4 Robot. A volume of 100 μl stock solution was added to the remaining 900 μl plasma, mixed thoroughly and incubated at 37 C (corresponding to an initial concentration of 10 μg of the test compounds/nil). At each time point (0.2, 60, 120, 180, 240, 360, 480, 662 and 720 min., respectively) 100 μl of the drug containing plasma was collected, mixed with 560 μl ice cold extraction solution and immediately extracted by SPE as described above. The extracted plasma samples were analysed by LC-MS.
  • The LC-MS analysis were performed on an HP 1100 series LC in combination with a Quattro Ultima II triple quadrupole MS instrument.
  • The samples were kept at 18° C. in the autosampler tray prior to injection of 10 μl. The separations were performed at 30° C. on a Vydac 218MS52 (2.1×250 mm) LC column using a linear gradient from 15 to 50% B within 14 min. at a flow rate of 250 μl/min. 0.1% formic acid in water was used as mobile phase A and 0.1% formic acid in MeCN as mobile phase B. Compound 4 and Compound (iii) were detected by single ion recording (SIR) using the 6 H+ (m/z=676.7) and 4 H+ (m/z=822.1) ion species, respectively. The cone voltage for the analysis of compound (iii) and Compound 4 was set to 100 and 70 V, respectively.
  • The in vitro stability of Compound (iii) and Compound 4 have been investigated in rat plasma by LC-MS. The degradation of the two compounds were followed for 720 min. and the results were plotted as the natural logarithm of the peak area vs. time. The degradation rates (kobs) of the compounds were found as the slope after linear regression, and the half-life (T1/2) was found as ln 2/kobs. The results from the experiment are listed below.
  • Degradation Study over 720 minutes in Rat Plasma
    Compound T½ (min) kobs (min−1) r2
    Compound (iii) 238.4 0.0029 0.9785
    Compound 4 466.1 0.0015 0.8596
  • The conclusion of the experiment is therefore that the provision of a C-terminal Lys (SEQ ID NO: 9) peptide conjugation to the (Gly8)hGLP-1(7-36) (SEQ ID NO: 87) sequence results in a two fold increased stability in rat plasma.
  • 24. Single Dose Effect of Oral and Parenteral Administration of Compound 5 on Blood Glucose Levels in Diabetic ob/ob Mice.
  • The compounds of the invention possess blood glucose lowering properties. This was examined using Compound 5 to test the effect on blood glucose (BG) levels in the ob/ob mutant mice after intraperitoneal (i.p.) and peroral (p.o.) administration. Compound 5 reduced BO levels in diabetic mice in a dose of 110 μg/mouse when administered i.p. Likewise p.o. administration of Compound 5 elicited a similar decrease in BG levels in a dose of 1100 μg/mouse, but not at lower doses.
    • Experimental
  • Forty female diabetic ob/ob mice (Ume{dot over (a)} strain, Bomholtgaard), which are obese due to a dominant mutant leptin (Tomita, T., Doull, V., Pollock, H. G, and Krizsan, D. 1992. Pancreatic islets of obese hyperglycemic mice (ob/ob). Pancreas 7: 367-75) were housed (3 mice/cage) under controlled ambient conditions following a 12:12-h light:dark cycle and fed standard Altromin no 1324 diet with free access to tap water. At arrival the animals were 8 weeks of age. The mice were allowed 2 weeks of acclimatization before experiments were initiated. At the time of experiment the mice were 13 weeks old with a body weight of 41.8±3.2 g (mean±SD; n=42). Handling of the mice one and three days before the experiment was performed in order to reduce stress-induced BG excursions. On the day of the experiment, blood was taken from the tip of the tail 2-3 hours after the light was turned on. A single drop of blood (<5 μl) was dropped on the glucose strip for analysis and measured by an Elite Autoanalyser, Bayer, Denmark. Whole blood glucose (BG) concentration was analysed by the immobilised glucose oxidase method. Blood glucose levels varied between normoglycaemia and severe hyperglycaemia (range: 3.6-15.6 mM; mean±SD: 9.4±3.3 mM; n=42). Six animals with BG<5.8 mM were excluded from the study (total n=36). The remaining animals were stratified based on their BG levels in order to ensure that the mean BG was similar among groups. One hour after the initial control blood sampling, drugs were administered and BG was measured at t=60 min, t=120 min, t=240 min, t=480 min.
    • Peptides and Other Materials
  • Compound 5 (batch nr. ZP 3.12 fraction 1-2. Purification) was synthesised by the Department of Chemistry, Zealand Pharmaceuticals. The peptide was dissolved in sterile isotonic NaCl shortly before dosing and given in a volume of 0.2 ml. The same solutions were used for both p.o. and i.p. administration. For each animal, a data log sheet was filled out at the time of each blood sampling.
    • Drug Administration
  • Animals were administered with Compound 5, and the maximum dose was 1100 μg/mouse and the lowest dose was 1.1 μg/mouse. As a negative control, saline was administered p.o. and as positive control the test compound was given i.p. in a dose of 110 μg/mouse.
  • During control conditions, BG levels in non-fasted ob/ob mice were similar in all groups (individual group data not shown), but within groups, there was a great scatter on BG levels (BG range for all animals: 5.8-15.6 mM). Therefore, to correct for the varying degree of hyperglycemia, results are expressed as the relative difference from baseline (% control). Intraperitoneal administration of 110 μg Compound 5 produced a sustained decrease in BG that reached nadir at 1-2 hrs after administration of the compound. No changes were observed in saline treated animals. In most groups (5/6), BG increased between 4 and 8 hrs after drug administration. Compound 5 reduced the BG levels in a dose of 110 μg/mouse when administered i.p. in diabetic ob/ob mice (data not shown). The antidiabetic effect was observed after 60 minutes and was maximal 2-4 h after administration of the compound. Furthermore, a long-lasting effect (>8 hours) suggests that Compound 5 has a longer duration of action than the notoriously short-acting native GLP-1 (Bailey, C. J. & Flatt, P. R. 1987. Glucagon-like peptide-1 and the entero-insular axis in obese hyperglycaemic (ob/ob) mice. Life Sci, 40, 521-5). The dose 1100 μg/mouse p.o. elicited a similar decrease in BG as observed in animals treated with 110 μg i.p.
  • We have shown that Compound 5 effectively lowers BG levels in diabetic ob/ob mice following i.p. administration of 110 μg/mouse the compound. A similar effect is seen after 1100 μg/mouse of Compound 5 when given by the oral route. This suggests that the compound is absorbed from the gastrointestinal tract.
  • 25. In Vivo Studies with
  • Compound 1 (des Pro36-exendin-4(1-39)-NH2 
    (SEQ ID NO: 101)),
    Compound 2 (des Pro36-exendin-4(1-39)-Lys6-NH2 
    (SEQ ID NO: 93)),
    Compound (iii) (Gly8-GLP1-(7-36)(Human)-NH2 
    (SEQ ID NO: 87)),
    Compound 4 (Gly8-GLP1-(7-36)(Human)-Lys6-NH2 
    (SEQ ID NO: 88)) and
    Compound 5 (Gly8Lys37(palmitoyl)-GLP1-(7-36)(Human)-
    Lys7-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 89))
  • Various concentrations of each peptide are administered orally and intraperitoneally to ob/ob mice to determine if these compounds affect blood glucose levels. The experimental conditions used were the same as described in Example 24.
    • Peptides and Other Materials
  • Des Pro36-exendin-4(1-39)-NH2 (Compound 1, SEQ ID NO:101) and the same peptide, but with an additional sequence, Lys6, attached at the C-terminal, des Pro36-exendin-4(1-39)-Lys6-NH2 (Compound 2, SEQ ID NO:93), Gly8-GLP1-(7-36)(Human)-NH2 (Compound (ii), SEQ ID NO:87) and the same peptide, but with an additional sequence, Lys6, attached at the C-terminal, Gly8-GLP1-(7-36)(Human)-Lys6-NH2 (Compound 4, SEQ ID NO:88) and Gly8Lys37(palmitoyl)-GLP1-(7-36)(Human)-Lys7-NH2 (Compound 5, SEQ ID NO:89) are synthesized using methods described above. Solutions are prepared on the morning of dosing, immediately before the animals are administered. The same solutions are used for both peroral and interperitoneal administration. All peptides are dissolved in sterile isotonic NaCl and given in a volume of 0.2 ml. All experiments are carried out in the same mice to compare the active doses of the peptides shown in Table 2. Blood sampling is performed as described above and the animals are administered with the doses shown in Table 3. As negative control, saline is administered perorally. Results are shown in Table 4.
  • TABLE 2
    Number Compound
    Compound
     1 des Pro36-exendin-4(1-39)-NH2 
    (SEQ ID NO: 101)
    Compound 2 des Pro36-exendin-4(1-39)-Lys6-NH2 
    (SEQ ID NO: 93)
    Compound (ii) G1y8-GLP1-(7-36)(Human)-NH2 
    (SEQ ID NO: 87)
    Compound 4 Gly8-GLP1-(7-36)(Human)-Lys6-NH2 
    (SEQ ID NO: 88)
    Compound 5 Gly8Lys37(palmitoyl)-GLP1-
    (7-36)(Human)-Lys7-NH2
    (SEQ ID NO: 89)
  • TABLE 3
    Group Group Group Group Group 5 Group
    1 2 3 4 Dose 6
    Dose Dose Dose Dose peroral Dose
    peroral peroral peroral peroral μl/mouse i.p
    μg/ μg/ μg/ μg/ Isotonic μg/
    Compound mouse mouse mouse mouse saline mouse
    Compound
    1 400 40 4 0.4 200 μl 40
    Compound 2 1000 100 10 1 200 μl 100
    Compound (ii) 1000 100 10 1 200 μl 100
    Compound 4 1000 100 10 1 200 μl 100
    Compound 5 1000 100 10 1 200 μl 100
  • Group data were summarised as the mean±SEM of the individual results in each treatment group. In order to analyse the effects of the compounds, the absolute and the relative (% of t=0) difference from baseline was calculated for each time point.
  • TABLE 4
    0 1 hour 2 hours 4 hours
    Compound 1-saline 100 103 107 92
    Compound 1-400 μg po 100 93 88 93
    Compound 1-40 μg po 100 89 89 91
    Compound 1-4 μg po 100 105 88 91
    Compound 1-0.4 μg po 100 106 103 100
    Compound 1-40 μg ip 100 68 69 74
    Compound 2-saline 100 100 112 114
    Compound 2-1000 μg po 100 67 69 64
    Compound 2 100 μg po 100 78 71 72
    Compound 2-10 μg po 100 86 72 72
    Compound 2 1 μg po 100 112 101 96
    Compound 2 100 μg ip 100 75 67 63
    Compound (ii)-saline 100 95 87 100
    Compound (ii)-1000 μg po 100 87 105 94
    Compound (ii)-100 μg po 100 118 111 92
    Compound (ii)-10 μg po 100 101 94 104
    Compound (ii)-1 μg po 100 94 89 96
    Compound (ii)-100 μg ip 100 70 60 81
    Compound 4-saline 100 102 94 79
    Compound 4-1000 μg po 100 128 72 78
    Compound 4-100 μg po 100 72 70 58
    Compound 4-10 μg po 100 98 95 81
    Compound 4-1 μg po 100 99 89 84
    Compound 4 100 μg ip 100 83 58 56
    Compound 5-saline 100 90 86 103
    Compound 5-1000 μg po 100 73 75 67
    Compound 5-100 μg po 100 97 140 107
    Compound 5-10 μg po 100 90 120 126
    Compound 5-1 μg po 100 111 133 114
    Compound 5-100 μg ip 100 63 50 52
  • The results obtained are shown in Table 4 and in FIGS. 1-3.
  • These results show that all tested compounds have an effect in lowering blood glucose levels.
  • The effect is most pronounced when Compound 1 is given intraperitoneally whereas the effect of 1000 μg po of Compound 2 is comparable to the effect of 100 μg ip of Compound 2. The potency of Compound 1 (des Pro36-exendin-4(1-39)-NH2, SEQ ID NO:101) and Compound 2 (des Pro36-exendin-4(1-39)-Lys6-NH2, SEQ ID NO:93) when given intraperitoneally is shown to be very similar to exendin-4(1-39)-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 102) (Compound (i)) itself (data not given) administered in the same way.
  • For Compound 1, des Pro36-exendin-4(1-39)-NH2 (SEQ ID NO:101), there is no effect in lowering blood glucose levels up to a dose of 400 μg/mouse when the compound is administered perorally, whereas for the same compound with the addition of the Lys6 fragment there is activity seen at a dose of 10 μg/mouse. This indicates that the minimum effective oral dose of the des Pro36-exendin-4(1-39)-Lys6-NH2 (SEQ ID NO:93) is at least 40 times lower than for des Pro36-exendin-4(1-39)-NH2 (SEQ ID NO:101).
  • These results show that the attachment of the sequence Z has no significant effect on the potency of the various peptides when administered interperitoneally while significantly enhancing the potency of the compound when administered perorally.
  • 26. Bioavailability of Compound 4 and Compound (iii) after Gastro-Intestinal Delivery in Duodenum in Conscious Rats.
  • Various peptide based GLP-1 analogues have been developed for parenteral use, but none of these substances has been pharmacologically effective after oral administration [Hoist, J. J.: Enteroglucagon. Annu Rev Physiol, 59:257-271, 1997]. It was decided to examine the absorption of the test compound from the duodenum in conscious rats. Compound (iii) (Gly8)hGLP-1(7-36)-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 87) was used as reference.
    • Chemicals and Reagents
  • Blank rat plasma in sodium heparin (5000 units/mL) were obtained from Harlan Sera Lab Ltd. (Loughborough, UK). OASIS™ HLB solid phase extraction columns, 1 cc, 30 mg sorbent, were obtained from Waters (Milford, Mass., USA) and ISOLUTE C18 (EC), 1 cc, SPE columns were obtained from IST (Mid Glamorgan, U.K.). The LC/MS analysis was performed on a HP 1100 instrument consisting of an on-line degasser, a binary gradient pump, an auto sampler, a column oven, Hewlett Packard (Wilmington, Del., USA) in combination with a Quattro Ultima mass spectrometer from Micromass (Altrincham, UK) both the LC and MS were controlled by MassLynx 3.3 software. The LC separations prior to MS detection were performed on a Vydac 218MS52 (2.1×250 mm) column (Hesperia, Calif., USA).
    • Drugs and Dose Levels:
  • Compound 4 (batch No. ZP 7.97-5-F, 4053 g/mol) and Compound (iii) (batch No. ZP 7.73-2-G, 3854 g/mol) were synthesised in-house using the Fmoc strategy. The identification was performed by mass spectrometry and the purity of both batches was determined by RP-HPLC to 97 and 99.7% for the test compounds, respectively. The peptide content of the batches were 72% and 80% for ZP 7.97-5-F and ZP 7.73-2-G, respectively. The peptides were dissolved in pyrogen free isotonic saline and doses of 1.000 or 10.000 nmol/kg administered through the intra duodenal catheter in a volume of 100 μl.
    • Animals:
  • Fourteen Sprague-Dawley rats weighing 250 to 350 g. were used for the experiment. The rats were anaesthetised with Hypnorm®-Dormicum® s.c. and a catheter was inserted into the femoral artery for arterial blood sampling. An additional catheter was inserted into the duodenum via an incision in the ventricle. Before the experiment was started, the rats were allowed to recover for one week after the operation. The operated rats were conscious at the day of the experiment. In order to establish whether the intra duodenal catheters were situated in the duodenum, an autopsy was performed on the rats immediately after the experiment.
    • Sample Treatment:
  • Blood samples were collected at t=−5, 5, 10, 15, 20, 40, and 60 min. The blood was collected in EDTA containing ice-chilled tubes and immediately centrifuged at 4° C. for 5 min (4.000×g). Plasma (250 μl) was transferred to ice-chilled 0.75 ml PLC vials containing 250 μl extraction solution (MeCN: 0.18 M Ammonium Carbonate pH 9.5, 10:90 v/v). The plasma samples were stored at −20?C until SPE and LC/MS analysis.
    • Solid Phase Extraction:
  • The drug containing plasma samples (400 μl) were loaded onto solid phase extraction columns preconditioned with 950 μl MeCN followed by 950 μl water. The columns were washed with 950 μl 2% TFA in water followed by an equal volume of 2% TFA in MeCN:water (20:78 v/v). The analytes were eluted with 500 μl 2% TFA in MeCN:water (60:38 v/v) and analysed by LC/MS.
    • LC/MS
  • The samples were kept at 18° C. in the auto sampler tray prior to injection of 20 to 50 μl onto the LC column (Vydac 218MS52 (2.1×250 mm). The separations were performed at 30° C. using a flow rate of 250 μl/min and a gradient according to Table 1. Both the test compound and the reference drug were detected by single ion recording (SIR) using the m/z=676.7 and the m/z=1095.2 and 821.8 ion species, respectively. All instrument conditions were controlled by MassLynx software ver. 3.3 software.
  • Compound Gradient
    Compound
    4 Initial: 15% B, 0-14 min; 15-50% B, 14-15 min;
    50-15% B and 15-20 min 15% B.
    Compound (iii) Initial: 25% B, 1-1.5 min; 25-30% B, 1.5-10 min;
    30-40% B, 10-10.5 min; 40-90% B, 11.5-12 min;
    90-25% B, and 12-17 min 25% B.
    The gradient used for the analysis of the test compounds using 0.1% formic acid in water or MeCN as Mobile phase A or B, respectively.
  • The plasma samples were analysed as described under materials and methods. The bioavailability of Compound 4 was examined in doses of 1.000 (n=4) and 10.000 (n=5) nmol/k, whereas Compound (iii) was only studied in a dose of 10.000 (n=5) nmol/kg. At all the investigated time points the concentration of Compound (iii) was below the detection limit (approx. 0.5 nM), the exact bioavailability could therefore not be estimated. In contrast, Compound 4 was detected in the plasma samples from two out of four rats after intra duodenal administration of 1.000 nmol/kg and in four out of five rats following administration of 10.000 nmol/kg.
  • 27. In Vivo Pharmacokinetics of Compound 1, Compound 2, Compound 4, and Compound (iii) After i.v. Administration to Rabbits and Pigs
  • We have shown an increased in vitro stability of the GLP-1 agonist Compound 4 when compared to the reference drug Compound (iii) in rat plasma. In order to establish whether this effect is sustained in vivo, the pharmacokinetic parameters of the two compounds are examined in rabbits. Using the same experimental conditions these parameters were also measured for Compounds 1 and 2 in rabbits and using similar conditions in pigs.
    • Chemicals and Reagents
  • Blank rabbit plasma in sodium heparin (5000 units/mL) were obtained from Harlan Sera Lab Ltd. (Loughborough, UK). OASIS™ HLB solid phase extraction columns, 1 cc, 30 mg sorbent, were obtained from Waters (Milford, Mass., USA) and ISOLUTE C18 (EC), 1 cc, SPE columns were obtained from IST (Mid Glamorgan, U.K.). The LC/MS analysis was performed on a HP 1100 instrument consisting of an on-line degasser, a binary gradient pump, an auto sampler, a column oven, Hewlett Packard (Wilmington, Del., USA) in combination with a Quattro Ultima mass spectrometer from Micromass (Altrincham, UK) both the LC and MS were controlled by MassLynx 3.3 software. The LC separations prior to MS detection were performed on a Vydac 218MS52 (2.1×250 mm) column (Hesperia, Calif., USA).
    • Drugs and Dose Levels:
  • Compound 4 (batch No. ZP 7.97-5-F, 4053 g/mol) and Compound (iii) (batch No. ZP 7.73-2-G, 3854 g/mol) were synthesised in-house using the Fmoc strategy. The identification was performed by mass spectrometry and the purity of both batches were determined by RP-HPLC to 97 and 99.7% for the test compounds, respectively. The peptide content of the batches were 72% and 80% for ZP 7.97-5-F and ZP 7.73-2-G, respectively. The peptides were dissolved in pyrogen free isotonic saline and both peptides were administered i.v. to rabbits and rats using a dose of 1000 nmol/kg.
    • Rabbits:
  • Fifteen New Zealand White rabbits weighing 2.5 to 3.0 kg were used for the experiment. On the day of the experiment, the rabbits were anaesthetised with Hypnorm® i.m. followed by Dormicum® i.v. Catheters were inserted into the femoral vein and artery for i.v. administration of drugs and arterial blood sampling. The rabbits stayed unconscious throughout the experiment.
    • Sample Treatment:
  • Blood Samples were collected at t=1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180 and 240 min. The blood was collected in EDTA containing ice-chilled tubes and immediately centrifuged at 4 C for 5 min (20.000×g). Plasma (250 μl) was transferred to ice-chilled 0.75 ml PLC vials containing 250 μl extraction solution (MeCN: 0.18 M Ammonium Carbonate pH 9.5, 10:90 v/v). The plasma samples were stored at −20 C until SPE and LC/MS analysis.
    • Solid Phase Extraction:
  • The drug containing plasma samples (400 μl) are loaded onto OASIS™ HLB (Compound 4) or ISOLUTE™ (Compound (iii)) solid phase extraction columns preconditioned with 950 μl MeCN followed by 950 μl water. The columns are washed with 950 μl 2% TFA in water followed by an equal volume of 2% TFA in MeCN:water (20:78 v/v). The analytes are eluted with 500 μl 2% TFA in MeCN:water (60:38 v/v) and analysed by LC/MS.
    • LC/MS
  • The samples were kept at 18 C in the auto sampler tray prior to injection of 20 to 50 μl onto the LC column (Vydac 218MS52 (2.1×250 mm). The separations were performed at 30° C. using a flow rate of 250 μl/min and a gradient according to the table below. Both the test compound and the reference drug are detected by single ion recording (SIR) using the m/z=676.7 and the m/z=1095.2 and 821.8 ion species, respectively. All instrument conditions were controlled by MassLynx software ver. 3.3 software.
  • Compound Gradient
    Compound
    4 Initial: 15% B, 0-14 min; 15-50% B, 14-15 min;
    50-15% B and 15-20 min 15% B.
    Compound (iii) Initial: 25% B, 1-1.5 min; 25-30% B, 1.5-10 min;
    30-40% B, 10-10.5 min; 40-90% B, 11.5-12 min;
    90-25% B, and 12-17 min 25% B.
    The gradient used for the analysis of the test compounds using 0.1% formic acid in water or MeCN as Mobile phase A or B, respectively.
  • The plasma samples were analysed as described under materials and methods and the plasma concentration (Cpl) plotted versus time in a semi log diagram. The plasma concentration were followed for three hours in rabbits, whereas the limited blood volume of rats restricted the blood sampling in this specie to one hour. The Cpl vs. time curves from the individual rabbits were fitted to a two-compartment open model (figure not shown) using 1/y2 weighted least squares in WinNonlin 3.1 (Pharsight Corp. (Mountain View, Calif.)). The pharmacokinetic constants obtained from the data analysis are listed in Table 5 and the degradation kinetics in rabbit after i.v. injection of 1 μmol/kg of Compound 4 and Compound (iii), respectively, is shown in FIG. 4.
  • TABLE 5
    In vivo kinetics in rabbits and pigs **
    Comp. (iii) Comp. 4 Comp. 1 Comp. 2 Comp. 2 **
    (n = 7) (n = 8) (n = 5) (n = 5) (n = 2)
    Parameter Mean Mean Mean Mean Mean
    T1/2, α min 23 6.8 4.4 11 16
    T1/2, β min 10.8 28.0 23 69 252
    Table 5: The pharmacokinetic constants were obtained from rabbits when the Cpl vs. time curves was fitted mathematically. The compounds were administered iv in a concentration of 1000 nmol/kg. T1/2 values are given in minutes (min) for the α and β phase. Statistics: two-tailed t-test assuming samples with unequal variances showed p < 0.001 for all measured parameters. In conclusion the T½ value for Compound 4 is approximately three times the value for the reference Compound (iii) and, likewise, the T½ value for Compound 2 is approximately three times the value calculated for Compound 1 which represents the unconjugated equivalent.
    • 28. Glucose Tolerance Test of Compounds 2, 14-16, 18 and 19 Compared to Compound (i)
  • Male diabetic db/db mice (M&B, Bomholdtgaard, LI. Skensved, Denmark) are used. This well-described mouse model has inherited malfunctions of the glucose metabolism due to a mutation in the leptin receptor. Like human patients with uncontrolled non-insulin demanding diabetes mellitus (NIDDM), homozygous db/db mice experience polydipsia, polyuria and glycosuria and gain weight during their first 3 months of life despite their hyperglycaemic stage. However, in this model the hyperglycaemia is associated with progressive pancreatic islet atrophy with possible ketosis and death at 6-8 months of age. Thus, attention should be paid to the progression and status of their disease state. Therefore, preferably only db/db mice less than 16 weeks old should be used for drug testing og GLP-1 analogues.
  • All animals are acclimatised for at least one week and handled daily for two days prior to the first oral glucose tolerance test (OGTT). Furthermore, to reduce stress-induced glucose excursions, the animals should be subjected to at least one OGTT without compound as described below prior to the experiment. Due to the great scatter of glucose tolerance among diabetic mice, the animals are stratified by an OGTT prior to their first use.
    • Peptides
  • Peptides are dissolved in 0.1 M phosphate-buffered saline (PBS) with 0.1% bovine albumin where pH is adjusted to 7.4 by adding 5 M NaOH. All solutions are prepared fresh on the morning immediately before the experiment. Vehicle treated animals are given PBS with 0.1% albumin alone.
    • Glucose Tolerance Test and Dosing
  • Before the oral glucose tolerance test, the animals are fasted for 17 hours (from 4 p.m. until 9 a.m. the following morning). Beginning at 9.00 a.m. blood is taken from the tail tip (t=−15 min) and blood glucose is measured. The whole blood glucose (mM) concentration is analysed by the immobilised glucose oxidase method using a drop of blood (<5 μl, Elite Autoanalyser, Bayer, Denmark) following the manufacturer's manual. Animals with severe diabetes (>10 mM) are excluded. Immediately after the initial blood sample, the animals receive an intraperitoneal (i.p.) injection of vehicle or a dose of antidiabetic compound. Injection volume is 200 μl/50 g body weight in all groups. Fifteen minutes after i.p. administration of the substance an oral dose of 1 g/kg glucose (Sigma, St. Louis) dissolved in water (200 μl/50 g body weight) is given, and the animals are returned to their home cages (t=0). Blood glucose levels are measured at t=30 mM, t=60 min, t=120 mM and t=240 min. The animals are fasted during the observation period. For each animal a data log sheet was filled in at the time of each blood sampling.
    • Calculations and Statistics
  • In order to analyse the effects of the compounds, the absolute and the relative difference from baseline (t=0) are calculated for each time point. The area under the curve for the whole experiment (AUC 0-240 min) is determined using the trapezoid method. On the day of stratification, the mice are distributed in order to ensure that the glucose tolerances are similar in all groups. However, to correct for the progression of the diabetes with time, a vehicle treated control group is tested on each day of experiment and the response to drugs are expressed relative to response observed in vehicle-treated time-control animals. Dose-response curves for each substance are plotted, cf. FIG. 5, and the effect of drug relative to responses obtained during treatment with vehicle are analysed using an ANCOVA analysis (analysis of covariance). Treatment (drug or vehicle) is considered the independent variable, AUC 0-240 min expressed as percent response in vehicle-treated time-control mice is the dependent variable, and drug dose is defined as covariate. Post-hoc analysis is performed using Fisher's Least Significant test. Differences are considered significant at the 0.05 level. Statistical analyses were performed using Statistica version 5.5 for Windows NT, StatSoft, Tulsa, Okla., U.S.A. The dose response curves shown in FIG. 5 clearly shows that all tested compounds exhibit a glucose lowering effect comparable to that of the reference drug.
  • 29. Effects of Compound 2 and Compound (i) on OGGT in db/db Mice
  • FIG. 7 is a plot of AUC for Compound 2 and Compound (i) in an OGTT performed using the same experimental conditions as described in Example 28. The figure shows that the blood glucose lowering effect of Compound 2 is the same as the effect of the prior art compound (iii).
  • 30. Long Term Effects of Compound 2, 100 Nmol/Kg i.p. On the Oral Glucose Tolerance Test (OGTT) when Administered Up to 24 Hours Before the OGTT
  • This experiment uses the maximal dose of 100 nmol/kg i.p. in db/db mice and otherwise, the same experimental conditions as described in Example 28 are used. Results are shown in FIG. 8 and the conclusion of the experiment is that the duration of action of Compound 2 is up to 18 hours in db/db mice.
  • The invention described and claimed herein is not to be limited in scope by the specific embodiments herein disclosed, since these embodiments are intended as illustrations of several aspects of the invention. Any equivalent embodiments are intended to be within the scope of this invention. Indeed, various modifications of the invention in addition to those shown and described herein will become apparent to those skilled in the art from the fore-going description. Such modifications are also intended to fall within the scope of the appended claims. Various references are cited herein, the disclosure of which are incorporated by reference in their entireties.

Claims (2)

1. A peptide conjugate comprising a peptide X selected from the group consisting of (a) an exendin having at least 90% homology to exendin-4; (b) a variant of said exendin wherein said variant comprises a modification selected from the group consisting of between one and five deletions at positions 34-39 and contains a Lys at position 40 having a lipophilic substituent; or (c) GLP-1 (7-36) (SEQ ID NO: 114) or GLP-1 (7-37) (SEQ ID NO: 123) having at least one modification selected from the group consisting of: (i) substitution of D-alanine, glycine or alpha-amino isobutyric acid for alanine at position 8 and (ii) a lipophilic substituent; and Z, a peptide sequence of 4-20.amino acid units covalently bound to said variant, wherein each amino acid unit in said peptide sequence, Z is selected from the group consisting of Ala, Leu, Ser, Thr, Tyr, Asn, Gin, Asp, Glu, Lys, Arg, His, Met, Orn, and amino acid units of the general formula I —NH—C(R1)(R2)—C(═O)-(1) wherein R1 and R2 are selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C1-6-alkyl, phenyl, and phenyl-methyl, wherein C1-6-alkyl is optionally substituted with from one to three substituents selected from halogen, hydroxy, amino, cyano, nitro, sulfono, and carboxy, and phenyl and phenyl-methyl is optionally substituted with from one to three substituents selected from C1-6-alkyl, C2-6-alkenyl, halogen, hydroxy, amino, cyano, nitro, sulfono, and carboxy, or R1 and R2 together with the carbon atom to which they are bound form a cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, or cycloheptyl ring, e.g. 2,4-diaminobutanoic acid and 2,3-diaminopropanoic acid; and a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or the c-terminal amide of said peptide conjugate, with the proviso that x is not exendin-4 or exendin-3.
2-48. (canceled)
US14/095,667 1999-07-12 2013-12-03 Peptide agonists of glp-1 activity Abandoned US20140336356A1 (en)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US14/095,667 US20140336356A1 (en) 1999-07-12 2013-12-03 Peptide agonists of glp-1 activity
US15/183,522 US20170107267A1 (en) 1999-07-12 2016-06-15 Peptide agonists of glp-1 activity
US15/950,413 US20180362611A1 (en) 1999-07-12 2018-04-11 Peptide agonists of glp-1 activity

Applications Claiming Priority (7)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US14359199P 1999-07-12 1999-07-12
US09/614,847 US6528486B1 (en) 1999-07-12 2000-07-12 Peptide agonists of GLP-1 activity
US10/291,226 US20040106547A1 (en) 1999-07-12 2002-11-08 Novel peptide agonists of GLP-1 activity
US11/515,812 US20070111940A1 (en) 1999-07-12 2006-09-05 Peptide agonists of GLP-1 activity
US12/770,667 US20110245165A1 (en) 1999-07-12 2010-04-29 Peptide agonists of glp-1 activity
US13/850,762 US20130210722A1 (en) 1999-07-12 2013-03-26 Methods for using peptide agonists having glp-1 activity
US14/095,667 US20140336356A1 (en) 1999-07-12 2013-12-03 Peptide agonists of glp-1 activity

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US13/850,762 Continuation US20130210722A1 (en) 1999-07-12 2013-03-26 Methods for using peptide agonists having glp-1 activity

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US201514959848A Continuation 1999-07-12 2015-12-04

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20140336356A1 true US20140336356A1 (en) 2014-11-13

Family

ID=29709523

Family Applications (9)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US09/614,847 Ceased US6528486B1 (en) 1999-07-12 2000-07-12 Peptide agonists of GLP-1 activity
US10/291,226 Abandoned US20040106547A1 (en) 1999-07-12 2002-11-08 Novel peptide agonists of GLP-1 activity
US12/770,667 Abandoned US20110245165A1 (en) 1999-07-12 2010-04-29 Peptide agonists of glp-1 activity
US12/957,916 Abandoned US20110144008A1 (en) 1999-07-12 2010-12-01 Peptide agonists of glp-1 activity
US13/850,762 Abandoned US20130210722A1 (en) 1999-07-12 2013-03-26 Methods for using peptide agonists having glp-1 activity
US13/944,735 Active 2025-07-12 USRE45313E1 (en) 1999-07-12 2013-07-17 Exendin variant peptides
US14/095,667 Abandoned US20140336356A1 (en) 1999-07-12 2013-12-03 Peptide agonists of glp-1 activity
US15/183,522 Abandoned US20170107267A1 (en) 1999-07-12 2016-06-15 Peptide agonists of glp-1 activity
US15/950,413 Abandoned US20180362611A1 (en) 1999-07-12 2018-04-11 Peptide agonists of glp-1 activity

Family Applications Before (6)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US09/614,847 Ceased US6528486B1 (en) 1999-07-12 2000-07-12 Peptide agonists of GLP-1 activity
US10/291,226 Abandoned US20040106547A1 (en) 1999-07-12 2002-11-08 Novel peptide agonists of GLP-1 activity
US12/770,667 Abandoned US20110245165A1 (en) 1999-07-12 2010-04-29 Peptide agonists of glp-1 activity
US12/957,916 Abandoned US20110144008A1 (en) 1999-07-12 2010-12-01 Peptide agonists of glp-1 activity
US13/850,762 Abandoned US20130210722A1 (en) 1999-07-12 2013-03-26 Methods for using peptide agonists having glp-1 activity
US13/944,735 Active 2025-07-12 USRE45313E1 (en) 1999-07-12 2013-07-17 Exendin variant peptides

Family Applications After (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US15/183,522 Abandoned US20170107267A1 (en) 1999-07-12 2016-06-15 Peptide agonists of glp-1 activity
US15/950,413 Abandoned US20180362611A1 (en) 1999-07-12 2018-04-11 Peptide agonists of glp-1 activity

Country Status (2)

Country Link
US (9) US6528486B1 (en)
ZA (1) ZA200200156B (en)

Cited By (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9649362B2 (en) 2010-04-27 2017-05-16 Zealand Pharma A/S Peptide conjugates of GLP-1 receptor agonists and gastrin and their use
US9861706B2 (en) 2011-11-03 2018-01-09 Zealand Pharma A/S GLP-1 receptor agonist peptide gastrin conjugates
US9975939B2 (en) 2012-09-17 2018-05-22 Zealand Pharma A/S Glucagon analogues
US10093713B2 (en) 2013-11-06 2018-10-09 Zealand Pharma A/S GIP-GLP-1 dual agonist compounds and methods
US10131702B2 (en) 2013-11-06 2018-11-20 Zealand Pharma A/S Glucagon-GLP-1-GIP triple agonist compounds
US10253078B2 (en) 2014-10-29 2019-04-09 Zealand Pharma A/S GIP agonist compounds and methods
US10336802B2 (en) 2015-04-16 2019-07-02 Zealand Pharma A/S Acylated glucagon analogue
US10457714B2 (en) 2013-10-17 2019-10-29 Zealand Pharma A/S Acylated glucagon analogues
US10905745B2 (en) 2016-12-09 2021-02-02 Zealand Pharma A/S Acylated GLP-1/GLP-2 dual agonists
US11034747B2 (en) 2013-10-17 2021-06-15 Zealand Pharma A/S Glucagon analogues and methods of use
US11795204B2 (en) 2012-07-23 2023-10-24 Zealand Pharma A/S Glucagon analogues

Families Citing this family (160)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
ATE289517T1 (en) * 1996-11-12 2005-03-15 Novo Nordisk As USE OF GLP-1 PEPTIDES
DE60021166T3 (en) * 1999-01-14 2019-08-22 Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Llc NEW EXENDIN AGONIST FORMULATIONS AND THEIR ADMINISTRATION
AU775063C (en) * 1999-04-30 2005-05-12 Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modified exendins and exendin agonists
US6924264B1 (en) 1999-04-30 2005-08-02 Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modified exendins and exendin agonists
US20090175821A1 (en) * 1999-05-17 2009-07-09 Bridon Dominique P Modified therapeutic peptides with extended half-lives in vivo
US6514500B1 (en) * 1999-10-15 2003-02-04 Conjuchem, Inc. Long lasting synthetic glucagon like peptide {GLP-!}
US6528486B1 (en) 1999-07-12 2003-03-04 Zealand Pharma A/S Peptide agonists of GLP-1 activity
EP1076066A1 (en) * 1999-07-12 2001-02-14 Zealand Pharmaceuticals A/S Peptides for lowering blood glucose levels
CN1162446C (en) 2001-05-10 2004-08-18 上海华谊生物技术有限公司 Insulinotropic hormone secretion peptide derivative
IL144583A0 (en) * 2001-07-26 2002-05-23 Peptor Ltd Chimeric protein kinase inhibitors
BR0314996A (en) * 2002-10-02 2005-08-09 Zealand Pharma As Composition, pharmaceutically acceptable composition, method for producing the composition, methods for stabilizing exendin-4 (1-39) or a variant, derivative or analogue thereof against degradation, before, during or after intended use, to treat diseases, to treat disease states associated with elevated blood glucose levels, to regulate blood glucose levels, to regulate gastric emptying, to stimulate the release of insulin in a mammal to reduce blood glucose level in a mammal, to reduce the level of plasma lipids in a mammal, to reduce mortality and morbidity after myocardial infarction in a mammal, to stimulate insulin release in a mammal, and to produce a stabilized exendin (1-39), and stabilized exendin (1-39)
JPWO2004037859A1 (en) * 2002-10-11 2006-02-23 株式会社三和化学研究所 GLP-1 derivative and transmucosal absorption preparation thereof
US20040209803A1 (en) * 2002-12-19 2004-10-21 Alain Baron Compositions for the treatment and prevention of nephropathy
US7790681B2 (en) * 2002-12-17 2010-09-07 Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Treatment of cardiac arrhythmias with GLP-1 receptor ligands
US7731947B2 (en) 2003-11-17 2010-06-08 Intarcia Therapeutics, Inc. Composition and dosage form comprising an interferon particle formulation and suspending vehicle
US7550590B2 (en) * 2003-03-25 2009-06-23 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors
US7638638B2 (en) 2003-05-14 2009-12-29 Takeda San Diego, Inc. Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors
PT2644206T (en) 2003-05-23 2019-07-10 Nektar Therapeutics Peg derivatives containing two peg chains
WO2005000222A2 (en) 2003-05-30 2005-01-06 Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Novel methods and compositions for enhanced transmucosal delivery of peptides and proteins
IL156429A0 (en) * 2003-06-12 2004-01-04 Peptor Ltd Cell permeable conjugates of peptides for inhibition of protein kinases
ZA200602051B (en) * 2003-08-13 2007-10-31 Takeda Pharmaceutical 4-pyrimidone derivatives and their use as peptidyl peptidase inhibitors
US7678909B1 (en) 2003-08-13 2010-03-16 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors
US7169926B1 (en) 2003-08-13 2007-01-30 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors
WO2005021026A2 (en) * 2003-08-29 2005-03-10 Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods for treating or ameliorating ghrelin-associated diseases and disorders
WO2005026148A1 (en) * 2003-09-08 2005-03-24 Takeda San Diego, Inc. Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors
JP2007513058A (en) * 2003-09-08 2007-05-24 武田薬品工業株式会社 Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitor
BR122019021416A2 (en) * 2003-09-19 2019-12-21
WO2005040195A2 (en) * 2003-10-24 2005-05-06 Azopax Therapeutics Llc Formulation of exendins
US8263084B2 (en) * 2003-11-13 2012-09-11 Hanmi Science Co., Ltd Pharmaceutical composition for treating obesity-related disease comprising insulinotropic peptide conjugate
ATE498404T1 (en) * 2003-12-09 2011-03-15 Novo Nordisk As REGULATION OF FOOD PREFERENCE WITH GLP-1 AGONISTS
US20060074025A1 (en) * 2003-12-26 2006-04-06 Nastech Pharmaceutical Company Inc. Therapeutic formulations for transmucosal administration that increase glucagon-like peptide-1 bioavailability
US20060210614A1 (en) * 2003-12-26 2006-09-21 Nastech Pharmaceutical Company Inc. Method of treatment of a metabolic disease using intranasal administration of exendin peptide
US20050143303A1 (en) * 2003-12-26 2005-06-30 Nastech Pharmaceutical Company Inc. Intranasal administration of glucose-regulating peptides
US20080318837A1 (en) * 2003-12-26 2008-12-25 Nastech Pharmaceutical Company Inc. Pharmaceutical Formation For Increased Epithelial Permeability of Glucose-Regulating Peptide
EP1789440A4 (en) * 2004-02-11 2008-03-12 Amylin Pharmaceuticals Inc Pancreatic polypeptide family motifs and polypeptides comprising the same
US8076288B2 (en) 2004-02-11 2011-12-13 Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Hybrid polypeptides having glucose lowering activity
BRPI0507594A (en) * 2004-02-11 2007-07-03 Amylin Pharmaceuticals Inc hybrid polypeptides with selectable properties
US7732446B1 (en) 2004-03-11 2010-06-08 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors
CN102127053A (en) * 2004-03-15 2011-07-20 武田药品工业株式会社 Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors
WO2005100388A1 (en) * 2004-04-19 2005-10-27 Biocon Limited Production of insulinotropic peptides
DE602005014969D1 (en) 2004-04-23 2009-07-30 Conjuchem Biotechnologies Inc PROCESS FOR PURIFYING ALBUMIN CONJUGATES
US20090069226A1 (en) * 2004-05-28 2009-03-12 Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Transmucosal delivery of peptides and proteins
US7687638B2 (en) * 2004-06-04 2010-03-30 Takeda San Diego, Inc. Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors
WO2005120492A1 (en) * 2004-06-11 2005-12-22 Novo Nordisk A/S Counteracting drug-induced obesity using glp-1 agonists
WO2006019965A2 (en) 2004-07-16 2006-02-23 Takeda San Diego, Inc. Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors
DE102004043153B4 (en) * 2004-09-03 2013-11-21 Philipps-Universität Marburg Invention relating to GLP-1 and exendin
WO2006029634A2 (en) * 2004-09-17 2006-03-23 Novo Nordisk A/S Pharmaceutical compositions containing insulin and insulinotropic peptide
DE102004058306A1 (en) 2004-12-01 2006-07-27 Sanofi-Aventis Deutschland Gmbh Process for the preparation of carboxy-terminally amidated peptides
AU2005310367A1 (en) * 2004-12-03 2006-06-08 Mederio Ag A medical product comprising a glucagon-like peptide medicament intended for pulmonary inhalation
SE0402976L (en) * 2004-12-03 2006-06-04 Mederio Ag Medical product
US7872124B2 (en) * 2004-12-21 2011-01-18 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors
WO2006083761A2 (en) 2005-02-03 2006-08-10 Alza Corporation Solvent/polymer solutions as suspension vehicles
US11246913B2 (en) 2005-02-03 2022-02-15 Intarcia Therapeutics, Inc. Suspension formulation comprising an insulinotropic peptide
US8263545B2 (en) * 2005-02-11 2012-09-11 Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Inc. GIP analog and hybrid polypeptides with selectable properties
BRPI0606992A2 (en) * 2005-02-11 2009-07-28 Amylin Pharmaceuticals Inc gip analog and polypeptides with selectable properties
AU2006224537A1 (en) * 2005-03-18 2006-09-21 Novo Nordisk A/S Extended GLP-1 compounds
US20090062192A1 (en) * 2005-03-18 2009-03-05 Novo Nordisk A/S Dimeric Peptide Agonists of the Glp-1 Receptor
TWI372629B (en) * 2005-03-18 2012-09-21 Novo Nordisk As Acylated glp-1 compounds
US20080200383A1 (en) * 2005-04-08 2008-08-21 Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Pharmaceutical Formulations Comprising Incretin Peptide and Aprotic Polar Solvent
BRPI0614649A2 (en) 2005-08-11 2011-04-12 Amylin Pharmaceuticals Inc hybrid polypeptides with selectable properties
EP2330124B1 (en) 2005-08-11 2015-02-25 Amylin Pharmaceuticals, LLC Hybrid polypeptides with selectable properties
EA014647B1 (en) * 2005-08-11 2010-12-30 Амилин Фармасьютикалз, Инк. Hybrid polypeptides with selectable properties
WO2007033265A1 (en) * 2005-09-14 2007-03-22 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors for treating diabetis
PL1931350T5 (en) * 2005-09-14 2021-11-15 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Administration of dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors
DK1942898T4 (en) 2005-09-14 2014-06-02 Takeda Pharmaceutical Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors for the treatment of diabetes
KR101368988B1 (en) * 2005-09-16 2014-02-28 다케다 야쿠힌 고교 가부시키가이샤 Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors
TW200745079A (en) * 2005-09-16 2007-12-16 Takeda Pharmaceuticals Co Polymorphs of benzoate salt of 2-[[6-[(3R)-3-amino-1-piperidinyl]-3,4-dihydro-3-methyl-2,4-dioxo-1(2H)-pyrimidinyl]methyl]-benzonitrile and methods of use therefor
TW200745080A (en) * 2005-09-16 2007-12-16 Takeda Pharmaceuticals Co Polymorphs of tartrate salt of 2-[2-(3-(R)-amino-piperidin-1-yl)-5-fluoro-6-oxo-6H-pyrimidin-1-ylmethyl]-benzonitrile and methods of use therefor
WO2007053946A1 (en) * 2005-11-09 2007-05-18 Conjuchem Biotechnologies Inc. Method of treating diabetes and/or obesity with reduced nausea side effects using an insulinotropic peptide conjugated to albumin
US20080318861A1 (en) * 2005-12-08 2008-12-25 Nastech Pharmaceutical Company Inc. Mucosal Delivery of Stabilized Formulations of Exendin
MX2008008076A (en) * 2005-12-22 2008-11-28 Conjuchem Biotechnologies Inc Process for the production of preformed conjugates of albumin and a therapeutic agent.
WO2007112347A1 (en) 2006-03-28 2007-10-04 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors
JP2009531456A (en) * 2006-03-28 2009-09-03 武田薬品工業株式会社 Preparation of (R) -3-aminopiperidine dihydrochloride
KR101106510B1 (en) 2006-05-30 2012-01-20 인타르시아 세라퓨틱스 인코포레이티드 Two-piece, internal-channel osmotic delivery system flow modulator
DE102006031962A1 (en) * 2006-07-11 2008-01-17 Sanofi-Aventis Deutschland Gmbh Amidated insulin glargine
AU2007284759B2 (en) 2006-08-09 2010-10-28 Intarcia Therapeutics, Inc. Osmotic delivery systems and piston assemblies
US8497240B2 (en) 2006-08-17 2013-07-30 Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Llc DPP-IV resistant GIP hybrid polypeptides with selectable properties
PE20081150A1 (en) * 2006-09-13 2008-10-03 Takeda Pharmaceutical DIPETHYLPEPTIDASE INHIBITORS
US8324383B2 (en) 2006-09-13 2012-12-04 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Methods of making polymorphs of benzoate salt of 2-[[6-[(3R)-3-amino-1-piperidinyl]-3,4-dihydro-3-methyl-2,4-dioxo-1(2H)-pyrimidinyl]methyl]-benzonitrile
TW200838536A (en) * 2006-11-29 2008-10-01 Takeda Pharmaceutical Polymorphs of succinate salt of 2-[6-(3-amino-piperidin-1-yl)-3-methyl-2,4-dioxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrimidin-1-ylmethy]-4-fluor-benzonitrile and methods of use therefor
RU2413528C2 (en) 2007-01-18 2011-03-10 Открытое Акционерное Общество "Валента Фармацевтика" Exenatide and dalargin drug for treating diabetes, adminisration and therapy
US8093236B2 (en) 2007-03-13 2012-01-10 Takeda Pharmaceuticals Company Limited Weekly administration of dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors
RU2440097C2 (en) 2007-04-23 2012-01-20 Интарсия Терапьютикс, Инк. Method of treating insulin-independent diabetes and obesity, osmotic delivery system and method for making it
US7886697B2 (en) * 2007-12-06 2011-02-15 Tima Foundation Optimized oral glucose tolerance test
WO2009075859A2 (en) * 2007-12-11 2009-06-18 Conjuchem Biotechnologies Inc. Formulation of insulinotropic peptide conjugates
DK2240155T3 (en) 2008-02-13 2012-09-17 Intarcia Therapeutics Inc Devices, formulations and methods for the delivery of several beneficial agents
CN105754918A (en) * 2008-04-09 2016-07-13 康奈尔大学 Commensal bacteria as signal mediators within a mammalian host
CN105727261A (en) * 2008-06-27 2016-07-06 杜克大学 Therapeutic agents comprising elastic peptides
JP5977945B2 (en) * 2008-08-06 2016-08-24 ノヴォ・ノルディスク・ヘルス・ケア・アーゲー Conjugate proteins with long-term in vivo efficacy
EP3228320B1 (en) 2008-10-17 2019-12-18 Sanofi-Aventis Deutschland GmbH Combination of an insulin and a glp-1 agonist
DK2344519T3 (en) 2008-11-07 2017-01-23 Massachusetts Gen Hospital C-TERMINAL FRAGMENTS OF GLUCAGON SIMILAR PEPTID-1 (GLP-1)
CN102292349B (en) 2009-01-22 2016-04-13 诺沃—诺迪斯克保健股份有限公司 Stable growth hormone compound
EP2435061A4 (en) 2009-05-28 2013-03-27 Amylin Pharmaceuticals Inc Glp-1 receptor agonist compounds for sleep enhancement
US8614182B2 (en) * 2009-07-30 2013-12-24 Jiangsu Hansoh Pharmaceuticals Co., Ltd. GLP-1 analogues and their pharmaceutical salts and uses
JP6086528B2 (en) 2009-08-06 2017-03-01 ノヴォ・ノルディスク・ヘルス・ケア・アーゲー Growth hormone with long-term in vivo efficacy
EP3735944A1 (en) 2009-09-28 2020-11-11 Intarcia Therapeutics, Inc. Rapid establishment and/or termination of substantial steady-state drug delivery
US20120294855A1 (en) 2009-11-03 2012-11-22 Eli Lilly & Company Glp-1 receptor agonist compounds for obstructive sleep apnea
AR080669A1 (en) * 2009-11-13 2012-05-02 Sanofi Aventis Deutschland PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION INCLUDING A GLP-1 AGONIST, AN INSULIN AND METIONIN
UY33025A (en) 2009-11-13 2011-06-30 Sanofi Aventis Deustschland Gmbh PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION INCLUDING A GLP-1 METIONINE AGONIST
BR112012012945A2 (en) 2009-11-25 2020-12-29 Arisgen Sa MUCOSAL RELEASE COMPOSITION, ITS PRODUCTION METHOD, PRE-FORMED PEPTIDE COMPLEX, KIT AND USE OF AN ACTIVE PEPTIDE AGENT
AU2011208625C1 (en) 2010-01-22 2022-08-18 Novo Nordisk Health Care Ag Growth hormones with prolonged in-vivo efficacy
RU2012134974A (en) 2010-01-22 2014-02-27 Ново Нордиск Хелс Кеа Аг STABILIZED GROWTH HORMONE COMPOUND
US9168288B2 (en) 2010-04-09 2015-10-27 Mount Sinai Hospital Methods for treating disorders of the gastrointestinal tract using a GLP-1 agonist
AU2011202239C1 (en) 2010-05-19 2017-03-16 Sanofi Long-acting formulations of insulins
MX339614B (en) 2010-08-30 2016-06-02 Sanofi - Aventis Deutschland GmbH Use of ave0010 for the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of diabetes mellitus type 2.
BR112013007442A2 (en) 2010-09-28 2019-09-24 Amylin Pharmaceuticals Llc constructed polypeptides having enhanced duration of action
KR20130097789A (en) 2010-10-15 2013-09-03 코넬 유니버시티 Compositions and methods for treating endocrine, gastrointestinal or autoimmune disorders
WO2012061466A2 (en) 2010-11-02 2012-05-10 The General Hospital Corporation Methods for treating steatotic disease
US9161953B2 (en) 2010-12-22 2015-10-20 Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Llc GLP-1 receptor agonists for islet cell transplantation
TWI494122B (en) * 2010-12-30 2015-08-01 Jiangsu Hansoh Pharmaceutical Derivative of a glp-1 analogue or its pharmaceutical salts and their use
US20120208755A1 (en) 2011-02-16 2012-08-16 Intarcia Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions, Devices and Methods of Use Thereof for the Treatment of Cancers
US9821032B2 (en) 2011-05-13 2017-11-21 Sanofi-Aventis Deutschland Gmbh Pharmaceutical combination for improving glycemic control as add-on therapy to basal insulin
EP2714069A4 (en) 2011-05-25 2015-06-24 Amylin Pharmaceuticals Llc Long duration dual hormone conjugates
WO2012160212A1 (en) 2011-05-25 2012-11-29 Camurus Ab Peptide controlled-release formulations
EP2729157B1 (en) 2011-07-06 2019-01-16 The General Hospital Corporation A pentapeptide derived from the c-terminus of glucagon-like peptide 1 (glp-1) for use in treatment
WO2013009648A2 (en) 2011-07-08 2013-01-17 Momenta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Cell culture process
WO2013009545A1 (en) 2011-07-08 2013-01-17 Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Engineered polypeptides having enhanced duration of action with reduced immunogenicity
RU2650616C2 (en) 2011-08-29 2018-04-16 Санофи-Авентис Дойчланд Гмбх Pharmaceutical combination for use in glycemic control in patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus
TWI559929B (en) 2011-09-01 2016-12-01 Sanofi Aventis Deutschland Pharmaceutical composition for use in the treatment of a neurodegenerative disease
EP2844269A4 (en) * 2012-03-28 2016-01-06 Amylin Pharmaceuticals Llc Transmucosal delivery of engineered polypeptides
UA116217C2 (en) 2012-10-09 2018-02-26 Санофі Exendin-4 derivatives as dual glp1/glucagon agonists
HUE035803T2 (en) 2012-12-21 2018-05-28 Sanofi Sa Dual glp1/gip or trigonal glp1/gip/glucagon agonists
TWI641381B (en) 2013-02-04 2018-11-21 法商賽諾菲公司 Stabilized pharmaceutical formulations of insulin analogues and/or insulin derivatives
CN110354255B (en) 2013-04-03 2024-05-14 赛诺菲 Treatment of diabetes by long acting insulin formulations
CN105120887A (en) 2013-04-05 2015-12-02 诺和诺德保健股份有限公司 Growth hormone compound formulation
EP3080149A1 (en) 2013-12-13 2016-10-19 Sanofi Dual glp-1/glucagon receptor agonists
WO2015086730A1 (en) 2013-12-13 2015-06-18 Sanofi Non-acylated exendin-4 peptide analogues
TW201609799A (en) 2013-12-13 2016-03-16 賽諾菲公司 Dual GLP-1/GIP receptor agonists
TW201609795A (en) 2013-12-13 2016-03-16 賽諾菲公司 EXENDIN-4 peptide analogues as dual GLP-1/GIP receptor agonists
WO2015104314A1 (en) 2014-01-09 2015-07-16 Sanofi Stabilized pharmaceutical formulations of insulin analogues and/or insulin derivatives
CN114939156A (en) 2014-01-09 2022-08-26 赛诺菲 Stabilized pharmaceutical formulations of insulin aspart
RU2016132386A (en) 2014-01-09 2018-02-14 Санофи STABILIZED PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS WITHOUT GLYCERIN BASED ON INSULIN ANALOGUES AND / OR INSULIN DERIVATIVES
KR101768446B1 (en) * 2014-03-21 2017-08-17 애니젠 주식회사 Novel Exenatide Analogs and Uses thereof
TW201625668A (en) 2014-04-07 2016-07-16 賽諾菲公司 Exendin-4 derivatives as peptidic dual GLP-1/glucagon receptor agonists
TW201625669A (en) 2014-04-07 2016-07-16 賽諾菲公司 Peptidic dual GLP-1/glucagon receptor agonists derived from Exendin-4
TW201625670A (en) 2014-04-07 2016-07-16 賽諾菲公司 Dual GLP-1/glucagon receptor agonists derived from EXENDIN-4
US9932381B2 (en) 2014-06-18 2018-04-03 Sanofi Exendin-4 derivatives as selective glucagon receptor agonists
GB201415598D0 (en) 2014-09-03 2014-10-15 Univ Birmingham Elavated Itercranial Pressure Treatment
US9889085B1 (en) 2014-09-30 2018-02-13 Intarcia Therapeutics, Inc. Therapeutic methods for the treatment of diabetes and related conditions for patients with high baseline HbA1c
CN107206058A (en) 2014-12-12 2017-09-26 赛诺菲-安万特德国有限公司 Insulin glargine/lixisenatide fixed ratio preparaton
TWI748945B (en) 2015-03-13 2021-12-11 德商賽諾菲阿凡提斯德意志有限公司 Treatment type 2 diabetes mellitus patients
TW201705975A (en) 2015-03-18 2017-02-16 賽諾菲阿凡提斯德意志有限公司 Treatment of type 2 diabetes mellitus patients
MA44390A (en) 2015-06-03 2019-01-23 Intarcia Therapeutics Inc IMPLANT PLACEMENT AND REMOVAL SYSTEMS
AR105319A1 (en) 2015-06-05 2017-09-27 Sanofi Sa PROPHARMS THAT INCLUDE A DUAL AGONIST GLU-1 / GLUCAGON CONJUGATE HIALURONIC ACID CONNECTOR
CN104844706B (en) * 2015-06-10 2018-08-03 成都圣诺生物科技股份有限公司 A method of synthesis lixisenatide
TW201706291A (en) 2015-07-10 2017-02-16 賽諾菲公司 New EXENDIN-4 derivatives as selective peptidic dual GLP-1/glucagon receptor agonists
MY197023A (en) 2015-12-23 2023-05-22 Amgen Inc Method of treating or ameliorating metabolic disorders using binding proteins for gastric inhibitory peptide receptor (gipr) in combination with glp-1 agonists
WO2017200943A1 (en) 2016-05-16 2017-11-23 Intarcia Therapeutics, Inc. Glucagon-receptor selective polypeptides and methods of use thereof
USD860451S1 (en) 2016-06-02 2019-09-17 Intarcia Therapeutics, Inc. Implant removal tool
USD840030S1 (en) 2016-06-02 2019-02-05 Intarcia Therapeutics, Inc. Implant placement guide
IL267736B2 (en) 2017-01-03 2024-03-01 Intarcia Therapeutics Inc Methods comprising continuous administration of a glp-1 receptor agonist and co-adminstration of a drug
JOP20190177A1 (en) 2017-01-17 2019-07-16 Amgen Inc Method of treating or ameliorating metabolic disorders using glp-1 receptor agonists conjugated to antagonists for gastric inhibitory peptide receptor (gipr)
KR20190126335A (en) 2017-03-08 2019-11-11 인타르시아 세라퓨틱스 인코포레이티드 Apparatus and Methods for Administering Nausea-Inducing Compounds from Drug Delivery Devices
BR112019024410A2 (en) 2017-06-20 2020-07-14 Amgen Inc. method of treating or improving metabolic disorders using gastric inhibitory peptide receptor (gipr) binding proteins in combination with glp 1 agonists
JP7332620B2 (en) 2018-04-10 2023-08-23 サノフィ－アベンティス・ドイチュラント・ゲゼルシャフト・ミット・ベシュレンクテル・ハフツング Synthesis of lixisenatide with capping
JP7434169B2 (en) * 2018-04-10 2024-02-20 サノフィ－アベンティス・ドイチュラント・ゲゼルシャフト・ミット・ベシュレンクテル・ハフツング Method for cleaving solid phase-bound peptides from solid phase
CN109721653B (en) * 2019-03-05 2023-02-03 嘉兴学院 Glucagon-like peptide-1 fragment analogue and application thereof
CN116323599A (en) 2020-08-06 2023-06-23 加舒布鲁姆生物公司 Heterocyclic GLP-1 agonists
WO2023169456A1 (en) 2022-03-09 2023-09-14 Gasherbrum Bio , Inc. Heterocyclic glp-1 agonists
WO2023179542A1 (en) 2022-03-21 2023-09-28 Gasherbrum Bio , Inc. 5,8-dihydro-1,7-naphthyridine derivatives as glp-1 agonists for the treatment of diabetes

Family Cites Families (58)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US106547A (en) * 1870-08-23 Improved device for propelling canal-boats
US194719A (en) * 1877-08-28 Improvement in horse hay-rakes
US88369A (en) * 1869-03-30 Improvement in music-binders
US57137A (en) * 1866-08-14 Coal-scuttle
US30326A (en) * 1860-10-09 Steam-g-eneratob
US111940A (en) * 1871-02-21 Improvement in excavafing-machines
US5545618A (en) 1990-01-24 1996-08-13 Buckley; Douglas I. GLP-1 analogs useful for diabetes treatment
US5424286A (en) 1993-05-24 1995-06-13 Eng; John Exendin-3 and exendin-4 polypeptides, and pharmaceutical compositions comprising same
AU7531094A (en) 1993-08-24 1995-03-21 Novo Nordisk A/S Protracted glp-1
CN1134110A (en) 1993-09-07 1996-10-23 安米林药品公司 Method for regulating gastrointestinal motility
ES2256888T3 (en) 1996-06-05 2006-07-16 Roche Diagnostics Gmbh EXENDINE ANALOGS, PROCESS FOR PREPARATION AND DRUGS THAT CONTAIN THEM.
PT966297E (en) 1996-08-08 2009-03-18 Amylin Pharmaceuticals Inc Regulation of gastrointestinal motility
US6384016B1 (en) 1998-03-13 2002-05-07 Novo Nordisk A/S Stabilized aqueous peptide solutions
EP1826216A1 (en) 1996-08-30 2007-08-29 Novo Nordisk A/S Glp-1 derivatives
US7235627B2 (en) 1996-08-30 2007-06-26 Novo Nordisk A/S Derivatives of GLP-1 analogs
US6268343B1 (en) * 1996-08-30 2001-07-31 Novo Nordisk A/S Derivatives of GLP-1 analogs
US6458924B2 (en) 1996-08-30 2002-10-01 Novo Nordisk A/S Derivatives of GLP-1 analogs
CZ295838B6 (en) 1996-09-09 2005-11-16 Zealand Pharma A/S Process for preparing peptides
JP2001505872A (en) 1996-09-09 2001-05-08 ジーランド ファーマシューティカルズ アクティーゼルスカブ Peptide prodrug containing α-hydroxy acid linker
US7176282B1 (en) 1996-09-09 2007-02-13 Zealand Pharma A/S Solid-phase peptide synthesis and agent for use in such synthesis
UA65549C2 (en) * 1996-11-05 2004-04-15 Елі Ліллі Енд Компані Use of glucagon-like peptides such as glp-1, glp-1 analog, or glp-1 derivative in methods and compositions for reducing body weight
WO1998022577A1 (en) 1996-11-15 1998-05-28 Maria Grazia Masucci Fusion proteins having increased half-lives
DK1629849T4 (en) 1997-01-07 2017-12-04 Amylin Pharmaceuticals Llc Pharmaceutical compositions comprising exedins and agonists thereof
US6136784A (en) 1997-01-08 2000-10-24 Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Amylin agonist pharmaceutical compositions containing insulin
US6410511B2 (en) * 1997-01-08 2002-06-25 Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Formulations for amylin agonist peptides
JP2001512307A (en) 1997-02-05 2001-08-21 １１４９３３６ オンタリオ インコーポレーテッド Polynucleotides encoding proexendin and methods for making and using the same
US5846937A (en) 1997-03-03 1998-12-08 1149336 Ontario Inc. Method of using exendin and GLP-1 to affect the central nervous system
KR20010012321A (en) 1997-05-07 2001-02-15 막스-플랑크-게젤샤프트 츄어 푀르더룽 데어 비쎈샤프텐 에.파우. New cysteine derivatives, processes for their production, and pharmaceuticals containing them
US7157555B1 (en) 1997-08-08 2007-01-02 Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Exendin agonist compounds
CA2299425A1 (en) 1997-08-08 1999-02-18 Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Novel exendin agonist compounds
JP2001523688A (en) 1997-11-14 2001-11-27 アミリン・ファーマシューティカルズ，インコーポレイテッド New exendin agonist compounds
US7223725B1 (en) 1997-11-14 2007-05-29 Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Exendin agonist compounds
US7220721B1 (en) 1997-11-14 2007-05-22 Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Exendin agonist peptides
MXPA00004670A (en) 1997-11-14 2003-07-14 Amylin Pharmaceuticals Inc Novel exendin agonist compounds.
EP1049486A4 (en) * 1997-12-05 2006-01-04 Lilly Co Eli Glp-1 formulations
US6703359B1 (en) 1998-02-13 2004-03-09 Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Inotropic and diuretic effects of exendin and GLP-1
ATE366115T1 (en) 1998-02-13 2007-07-15 Amylin Pharmaceuticals Inc INOTROPIC AND DIURETIC EFFECTS OF EXENDIN AND GLP-1
JP2002506792A (en) 1998-02-27 2002-03-05 ノボ ノルディスク アクティーゼルスカブ N-terminal modified GLP-1 derivative
JP2003522099A (en) 1998-02-27 2003-07-22 ノボ ノルディスク アクティーゼルスカブ GLP-1 derivative of GLP-1 having a delayed action profile and exendin
EP1950223A3 (en) 1998-03-09 2009-05-13 Zealand Pharma A/S Pharmacologically active peptide conjugates having a reduced tendency towards enzymatic hydrolysis
SE9802080D0 (en) 1998-06-11 1998-06-11 Hellstroem Pharmaceutical composition for the treatment of functional dyspepsia and / or irritable bowel syndrome and new use of substances therein
ES2335066T3 (en) 1998-08-10 2010-03-18 The Government Of The Usa, As Represented By The Secretary, Department Of Health And Human Services DIFFERENTIATION OF NON-INSULIN CELL PRODUCTS IN GLP-1 OR EXENDIN-4 INSULIN CELLS AND USING THEMSELVES.
DE60021166T3 (en) 1999-01-14 2019-08-22 Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Llc NEW EXENDIN AGONIST FORMULATIONS AND THEIR ADMINISTRATION
US7399489B2 (en) 1999-01-14 2008-07-15 Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Exendin analog formulations
ES2343072T3 (en) 1999-01-14 2010-07-22 Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Inc. EXENDINA FOR THE SUPPRESSION OF GLUCAGON.
US6451974B1 (en) * 1999-03-17 2002-09-17 Novo Nordisk A/S Method of acylating peptides and novel acylating agents
AU775063C (en) 1999-04-30 2005-05-12 Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modified exendins and exendin agonists
US6924264B1 (en) 1999-04-30 2005-08-02 Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modified exendins and exendin agonists
US7601691B2 (en) 1999-05-17 2009-10-13 Conjuchem Biotechnologies Inc. Anti-obesity agents
US6506724B1 (en) 1999-06-01 2003-01-14 Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Use of exendins and agonists thereof for the treatment of gestational diabetes mellitus
US6344180B1 (en) * 1999-06-15 2002-02-05 Bionebraska, Inc. GLP-1 as a diagnostic test to determine β-cell function and the presence of the condition of IGT and type II diabetes
US6528486B1 (en) 1999-07-12 2003-03-04 Zealand Pharma A/S Peptide agonists of GLP-1 activity
EP1076066A1 (en) 1999-07-12 2001-02-14 Zealand Pharmaceuticals A/S Peptides for lowering blood glucose levels
US6586438B2 (en) 1999-11-03 2003-07-01 Bristol-Myers Squibb Co. Antidiabetic formulation and method
AU2003243929B2 (en) 2002-07-04 2009-06-04 Zp Holding Spv K/S GLP-1 and methods for treating diabetes
BR0314996A (en) 2002-10-02 2005-08-09 Zealand Pharma As Composition, pharmaceutically acceptable composition, method for producing the composition, methods for stabilizing exendin-4 (1-39) or a variant, derivative or analogue thereof against degradation, before, during or after intended use, to treat diseases, to treat disease states associated with elevated blood glucose levels, to regulate blood glucose levels, to regulate gastric emptying, to stimulate the release of insulin in a mammal to reduce blood glucose level in a mammal, to reduce the level of plasma lipids in a mammal, to reduce mortality and morbidity after myocardial infarction in a mammal, to stimulate insulin release in a mammal, and to produce a stabilized exendin (1-39), and stabilized exendin (1-39)
US7623530B2 (en) 2003-11-20 2009-11-24 Nokia Corporation Indication of service flow termination by network control to policy decision function
TWI608013B (en) 2012-09-17 2017-12-11 西蘭製藥公司 Glucagon analogues

Cited By (21)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US10406207B2 (en) 2010-04-27 2019-09-10 Zealand Pharma A/S Peptide conjugates of GLP-1 receptor agonists and gastrin and their use
US9649362B2 (en) 2010-04-27 2017-05-16 Zealand Pharma A/S Peptide conjugates of GLP-1 receptor agonists and gastrin and their use
US9861706B2 (en) 2011-11-03 2018-01-09 Zealand Pharma A/S GLP-1 receptor agonist peptide gastrin conjugates
US11795204B2 (en) 2012-07-23 2023-10-24 Zealand Pharma A/S Glucagon analogues
US10253081B2 (en) 2012-09-17 2019-04-09 Zealand Pharma A/S Glucagon analogues
US9975939B2 (en) 2012-09-17 2018-05-22 Zealand Pharma A/S Glucagon analogues
US10457714B2 (en) 2013-10-17 2019-10-29 Zealand Pharma A/S Acylated glucagon analogues
US11884713B2 (en) 2013-10-17 2024-01-30 Zealand Pharma A/S Acylated glucagon analogues
US11091528B2 (en) 2013-10-17 2021-08-17 Zealand Pharma A/S Acylated glucagon analogues
US11034747B2 (en) 2013-10-17 2021-06-15 Zealand Pharma A/S Glucagon analogues and methods of use
US10131702B2 (en) 2013-11-06 2018-11-20 Zealand Pharma A/S Glucagon-GLP-1-GIP triple agonist compounds
US10093713B2 (en) 2013-11-06 2018-10-09 Zealand Pharma A/S GIP-GLP-1 dual agonist compounds and methods
US11111285B2 (en) 2013-11-06 2021-09-07 Zealand Pharma A/S Glucagon-GLP-1-GIP triple agonist compounds
US11008375B2 (en) 2013-11-06 2021-05-18 Zealand Pharma A/S GIP-GLP-1 dual agonist compounds and methods
US10253078B2 (en) 2014-10-29 2019-04-09 Zealand Pharma A/S GIP agonist compounds and methods
US11001619B2 (en) 2014-10-29 2021-05-11 Zealand Pharma A/S GIP agonist compounds and methods
US11814417B2 (en) 2014-10-29 2023-11-14 Zealand Pharma A/S GIP agonist compounds and methods
US11274136B2 (en) 2015-04-16 2022-03-15 Zealand Pharma A/S Acylated glucagon analogue
US10336802B2 (en) 2015-04-16 2019-07-02 Zealand Pharma A/S Acylated glucagon analogue
US11395847B2 (en) 2016-12-09 2022-07-26 Zealand Pharma A/S Acylated GLP-1/GLP-2 dual agonists
US10905745B2 (en) 2016-12-09 2021-02-02 Zealand Pharma A/S Acylated GLP-1/GLP-2 dual agonists

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20040106547A1 (en) 2004-06-03
US20110144008A1 (en) 2011-06-16
ZA200200156B (en) 2003-05-19
US6528486B1 (en) 2003-03-04
US20180362611A1 (en) 2018-12-20
US20130210722A1 (en) 2013-08-15
USRE45313E1 (en) 2014-12-30
US20170107267A1 (en) 2017-04-20
US20110245165A1 (en) 2011-10-06

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20180362611A1 (en) Peptide agonists of glp-1 activity
EP2112161B1 (en) Peptides that lower blood glucose levels
US7544657B2 (en) Stabilized Exendin-4 compounds

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: ZEALAND PHARMA A/S, DENMARK

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:LARSEN, BJARNE DUE;MIKKELSEN, JENS DAMSGAARD;NEVE, SOEREN;SIGNING DATES FROM 20000821 TO 20000822;REEL/FRAME:036382/0163

Owner name: ZP HOLDING SPV K/S, DENMARK

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:ZEALAND PHARMA A/S;REEL/FRAME:036382/0399

Effective date: 20150804

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION